Professional Documents
Culture Documents
320985-A November 2005 4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054
*320985-A*
Trademarks
*Nortel, Nortel Networks, the Nortel logo, the Globemark, Unified Networks, and BayStack are trademarks of Nortel Networks. Adobe and Adobe Reader are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. The asterisk after a name denotes a trademarked item.
Statement of conditions
In the interest of improving internal design, operational function, and/or reliability, Nortel Networks reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice. Nortel Networks does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product(s) or circuit layout(s) described herein. Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988, Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted, provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California, Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission. SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. In addition, the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure (that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties).
320985-A
4
Government, the respective rights to the software and software documentation are governed by Nortel Networks standard commercial license in accordance with U.S. Federal Regulations at 48 C.F.R. Sections 12.212 (for non-DoD entities) and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202 (for DoD entities). b. Customer may terminate the license at any time. Nortel Networks may terminate the license if Customer fails to comply with the terms and conditions of this license. In either event, upon termination, Customer must either return the Software to Nortel Networks or certify its destruction. Customer is responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from Customers use of the Software. Customer agrees to comply with all applicable laws including all applicable export and import laws and regulations. Neither party may bring an action, regardless of form, more than two years after the cause of the action arose. The terms and conditions of this License Agreement form the complete and exclusive agreement between Customer and Nortel Networks. This License Agreement is governed by the laws of the country in which Customer acquires the Software. If the Software is acquired in the United States, then this License Agreement is governed by the laws of the state of New York.
c.
d. e. f.
320985-A
Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Before you begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Related publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 How to get help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Getting help from the Nortel web site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Getting help over the phone from a Nortel Solutions Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Contents restore factory-default command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Ping enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 show interfaces config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Autosave enable/disable enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Download without reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 write memory and save config commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Daylight savings time enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 BootP when needed as default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 VLAN tagging enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 VLAN Configuration Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Port mirroring configuration rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Other features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Flash memory storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Switch software image storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Autosensing, and autonegotiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 RFCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 BootP automatic IP configuration/MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Configuration and switch management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 AC power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 User Interface button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Setting the unit as the Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting the unit as the non-base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Setting the unit as a standalone unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Resetting the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
320985-A
Contents Resetting the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Aborting a command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Setting the default IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask . . . . . . . . . . 73 Console port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Gigabit Interface Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Port connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Cascade Up and Down connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Cooling fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 AC power receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Network configuration examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Desktop switch application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Segment switch application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 High-density switched workgroup application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Stack operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Base unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Initial installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Stack MAC address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Removing a unit from the stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Stack configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Stack up configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Stack down configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Contents Accelerator keys for repetitive tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Adding a new port to an existing port number list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Removing a port from an existing port number list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Choosing a high speed flow control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Symmetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Asymmetric mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Rate Limiting Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Contents show sys-info command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 show tech command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 show stack-info command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 show stacking-mode command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 renumber unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Managing MAC address forwarding database table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 show mac-address-table command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 mac-address-table aging-time command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 default mac-address-table aging-time command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
10
Contents Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Selecting a single object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Viewing information about a GBIC port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 LEDs and ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Shortcut menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Status bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Using the buttons in Device Manager dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Editing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Working with statistics and graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Types of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Types of graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Statistics for single and multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Viewing statistics as graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Telnet session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Opening an SSH connection to the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Opening the Web-based management home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Trap log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Online Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
320985-A
Contents
11
12
Contents ip default-gateway command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 no ip default-gateway command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 show ip command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 show ip address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Assigning and clearing IP addresses for specific units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 no ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 default ip address unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Pinging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 ping command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Resetting the switch to default configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Using DNS to ping and telnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 show ip dns command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ping command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ip name-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 no ip name-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 no ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 default ip domain-name command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Configuration Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 Automatically loading Configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 configure network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266 show config-network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 ASCII Configuration Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 show running-config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 copy running-config tftp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Customizing your system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Setting the terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 show terminal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 terminal command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 show cli command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Displaying system information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Setting boot parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 boot command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
320985-A
Contents
13
no ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 default ip bootp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Setting TFTP parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 show tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 no tftp-server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 copy config tftp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 copy tftp config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Setting the default management interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 cmd-interface command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Customizing the opening banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 banner command for displaying banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 show banner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 no banner command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 Displaying the ARP table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Displaying interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 show interfaces command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 show interfaces config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Saving the configuration to NVRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 copy config nvram command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 write memory command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 save config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286 Enabling and disabling autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 show autosave command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 no autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 default autosave enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Setting time on network elements using Simple Network Time Protocol . . . . . . . . . . 289 show sntp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289 sntp enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 no sntp enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 sntp server primary address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 sntp server secondary address command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291 no sntp server command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 sntp sync-now command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
14
Contents sntp sync-interval command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Setting local time zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 no clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 no clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 show clock time-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 show clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Enabling Autopology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 no autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 default autotopology command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 show autotopology settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 show autotopology nmm-table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Configuring LLDP using the CLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 default lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 no lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302 default lldp port config notification command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 no lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 default lldp tx-tlv command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 no lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 default lldp port status command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 show lldp command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 show lldp port command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Configuring LEDs on the display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Configuring UI button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ui-button enable command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 ui-button unit command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 show ui-button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 default ui-button command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 no ui-button command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
320985-A
Contents
15
16
Contents
320985-A
Contents
17
Appendix A
System Configuration Guide
18
Contents
Appendix C Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Appendix D Sample BootP configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443 Appendix E
320985-A
Contents
19
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
20
Contents
320985-A
21
Figures
Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 LLDP how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Ethernet Switch 325-24G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Ethernet Switch 325-24G front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Ethernet Switch 325-24T back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Ethernet Switch 425 LED display panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Ethernet Switch 425 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a desktop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a desktop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Ethernet Switch 325 used as a segment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a segment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Stack up configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Stack down configuration example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Map of console interface screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Console interface main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Switch Configuration Menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 MAC Address Security Port Lists screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Port Configuration screen (1 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Port Configuration screen (2 of 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 High Speed Flow Control Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Rate Limiting Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 CLI command mode hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Ethernet Switch 425-48T banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Main Menu for Ethernet Switch 425-48T console interface . . . . . . . . . . 127 help command output in privExec mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 System Configuration Guide
22
Figures Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 show sys-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 show tech command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 show tech command output (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 show tech command output (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 show stack-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 show stacking-mode command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 show mac-address-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 mac-address-table aging-time output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 License Agreement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Choose Install Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Feature Sets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Choose Install Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Install Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 InstallAnywhere Introduction dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 License Agreement dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Choose Install Set dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Feature Sets dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Choose Install Folder dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Installing Java Device Manager dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Install Complete dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Properties dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Open Device dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Parts of the Device Manager window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Objects in the device view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Color port legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Switch unit shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Port shortcut menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Line graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
320985-A
Figures Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99
23
Area graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Bar graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Pie graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Interface statistics for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Interface statistics for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Statistics dialog box for a port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Web-based management home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Web-based management interface home page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Console page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Switch Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Stack Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Stack Numbering Setting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Identify Unit Numbers page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 IP Configuration/Setup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 SNMP Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 System Characteristics screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Login screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Renumber Stack Units screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Hardware Unit Information screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 TELNET Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Software Download screen for an Ethernet Switch 325/425 stack . . . . . 239 Configuration File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Configuration File Download/Upload screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 ASCII Configuration File Download screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Autosave Configuration screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 show ip command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 show ip address command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 ping command responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 show ip dns command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262 ping command responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 show config-network command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Output of the show running-config command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 show terminal command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
24
Figures Figure 100 show cli command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Figure 101 show sys-info command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Figure 102 show tftp-server command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 Figure 103 show arp-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Figure 104 show interfaces names command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 Figure 105 show interfaces command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Figure 106 show interfaces config command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Figure 107 show autosave command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Figure 108 show sntp command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Figure 109 show clock time-zone output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Figure 110 show clock summer-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Figure 111 show autotopology settings command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Figure 112 show autotopology nmm-table command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Figure 113 show lldp local-sys-data command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 Figure 114 show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Figure 115 show lldp stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Figure 116 show lldp port neighbor command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Figure 117 show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Figure 118 show lldp port rx-stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Figure 119 show lldp port tx-stats command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Figure 120 show lldp port tx-tlv command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Figure 121 ui-button enable command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Figure 122 show ui-button command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Figure 123 download message for Ethernet Switch 425-48T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Figure 124 shutdown [port <portlist>] command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Figure 125 show rate-limit command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Figure 126 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Figure 127 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Figure 128 Unit dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Figure 129 Rate Limit tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Figure 130 Globals tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Figure 131 Edit IP dialog box IP Address tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Figure 132 Edit IP dialog box ARP tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Figure 133 Edit Chassis dialog box System tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Figure 134 Edit Chassis dialog box Base Unit Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
320985-A
Figures
25
Figure 135 Edit Chassis dialog box Stack Info tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Figure 136 Edit Chassis dialog box Agent tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Figure 137 Edit Chassis dialog box Power Supply tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Figure 138 Edit Chassis dialog box Fan tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Figure 139 Edit Chassis dialog box Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Figure 140 Telnet window with default banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Figure 141 Telnet window without banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Figure 142 Edit Chassis dialog box Custom Banner tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Figure 143 Telnet window with custom banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Figure 144 FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Figure 145 File system - ASCII Config File dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Figure 146 SNTP dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Figure 147 Diagnostics dialog box Topology tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Figure 148 Diagnostics dialog box Topology Table tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Figure 149 Port dialog box Interface tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Figure 150 Interface tab fields for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Figure 151 System Information page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Figure 152 Quick Start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Figure 153 Reset page message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Figure 154 Reset page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Figure 155 Reset to Default page message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Figure 156 Reset to Default page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Figure 157 Logout message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Figure 158 IP page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Figure 159 System page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Figure 160 Port Management page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Figure 161 High Speed Flow Control page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Figure 162 Software Download page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Figure 163 Ascii Configuration file download page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Figure 164 Configuration File Download/Upload page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Figure 165 Console/Communication Port page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Figure 166 Rate Limiting page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Figure 167 Locking/extractor mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Figure 168 Nortel SFP label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Figure 169 Inserting an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
26
Figures Figure 170 Removing an SFP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Figure 171 RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Figure 172 MDI-X to MDI cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Figure 173 MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Figure 174 DB-9 Console port connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
320985-A
27
Tables
Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Table 7 Table 8 Table 9 Table 10 Table 11 Table 12 Table 13 Table 14 Table 15 Table 16 Table 17 Table 18 Table 19 Table 20 Table 21 Table 22 Table 23 Table 24 Table 25 Table 26 Table 27 Table 28 Table 29 VLAN Tagging mode definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 switch front panel . . . . . . . . . . 58 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 International power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Components of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 UI button LEDs on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 UI button LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask . . . 74 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Components on the Ethernet Switch 425 back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 International power cord specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Stack up configuration description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Stack down configuration description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Console interface main menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 System Characteristics screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Switch Configuration Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Port Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Rate Limiting Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Command mode prompts and entrance/exit commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Keystroke navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 configure command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 interface command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 shutdown command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 reload command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 show mac-address-table command parameters and variables . . . . . . . 144 mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables . . . 145 Properties dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 SNMP community string default values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 System Configuration Guide
28
Tables Table 30 Table 31 Table 32 Table 33 Table 34 Table 35 Table 36 Table 37 Table 38 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Open Device dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Menu bar commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Toolbar buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Selecting multiple objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Port color codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Switch unit shortcut menu command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Port shortcut menu commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Device Manager buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Types of statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Graph dialog box buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Help file locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Main headings and options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Menu icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Page icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Switch Information page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Stack Information page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Stack Numbering Setting page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 SNMP Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 System Characteristics screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Renumber Stack Units screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Software Download screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Parameters not saved to the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Autosave Configuration screen fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 no ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 ip default-gateway command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 show ip command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 show ip address command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 no ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
320985-A
Tables Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Table 83 Table 84 Table 85 Table 86 Table 87 Table 88 Table 89 Table 90 Table 91 Table 92 Table 93 Table 94 Table 95 Table 96 Table 97 Table 98 Table 99
29
default ip address unit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 259 ping command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 ping command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 ip name-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 no ip name-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 ip domain-name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 configure network command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . 270 terminal command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 show cli command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 boot command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 ip bootp server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 tftp-server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277 copy config tftp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 copy tftp config command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 cmd-interface command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 banner command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 show banner command parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 show interfaces command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283 show interfaces config command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 285 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables . . . . . 291 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables . . 292 no sntp server command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 clock time-zone command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 clock summer-time command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 default lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . . . 302 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . 303 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables . . . . 303 lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
30
Tables Table 100 Table 101 Table 102 Table 103 Table 104 Table 105 Table 106 Table 107 Table 108 Table 109 Table 110 Table 111 Table 112 Table 113 Table 114 Table 115 Table 116 Table 117 Table 118 Table 119 Table 120 Table 121 Table 122 Table 123 Table 124 Table 125 Table 126 Table 127 Table 128 Table 129 Table 130 Table 131 Table 132 Table 133 Table 134 no lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 default lldp port status command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . 307 show lldp command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 show lldp port command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 blink-leds command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 download command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 shutdown [port <portlist>] command parameters and variables . . . . . . 320 no shutdown command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 no name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 default name command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 speed command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 default speed command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 duplex command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 default duplex command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 default flowcontrol command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 rate-limit command parameters and variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Unit tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Rate Limit tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Globals tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Addresses tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 ARP tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 System tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Base Unit Info tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Stack Info tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Agent tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Power Supply tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Fan tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
320985-A
Tables Table 135 Table 136 Table 137 Table 138 Table 139 Table 140 Table 141 Table 142 Table 143 Table 144 Table 145 Table 146 Table 147 Table 148 Table 149 Table 150 Table 151 Table 152 Table 153 Table 154 Table 155 Table 156 Table 157 Table 158 Table 159 Table 160 Table 161 Table 162 Table 163 Table 164 Table 165 Table 166 Table 167 Table 168 Table 169
31
FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 ASCII Config File tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 SNTP dialog box fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Topology tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Topology Table tab fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Interface tab fields for a single port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Interface tab fields for multiple ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 System Information page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Items on the Quick Start page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 IP page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 System page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Port Management page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 High Speed Flow Control page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Software Download page fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 LED Indications during the software download process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Ascii Configuration file download page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Configuration File Setting items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Parameters not saved to the configuration file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Console/Communication Port page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Rate Limiting page items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Corrective actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 1000BASE-SFP models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Technical specifications for 1000BASE-SX, and 1000BASE-LX SFPs . 417 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418 1000BASE-LX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 1000BASE-SX SFP specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 CWDM SFP (70 km) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 CWDM SFP (40 km) specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 RJ-45 port connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Pin descriptions for 1000Base-T pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430 Factory default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 CLI command list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447 Environmental specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
32
Tables Table 170 Table 171 Table 172 Table 173 Table 174 Electrical parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 325 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
320985-A
33
Preface
This guide provides information about configuring and managing basic switching features on the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325 and Nortel Ethernet Switch 425. This guide describes the features of the following Nortel switches. Nortel Ethernet Switch 325-24T Nortel Ethernet Switch 325-24G Nortel Ethernet Switch 425-24T Nortel Ethernet Switch 425-48T
The term Ethernet Switch 325/425 is used in this document to describe the features common to the switches mentioned above. The term Ethernet Switch 325 is used to describe features of the Ethernet Switch 325-24G and Ethernet Switch 325-24T collectively. Similarly the term Ethernet Switch 425 is used to describe the features of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 425-48T collectively. A switch is referred to by its specific name while describing a feature exclusive to the switch. You can use the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 425-48T in the standalone and stack configuration mode. The Ethernet Switch 325 operates only in the standalone mode.
34
Preface
Text conventions
This guide uses the following text conventions: angle brackets (< >) Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets. Do not type the brackets when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is ping <ip_address>, you enter
ping 192.32.10.12
Indicates objects such as window names, dialog box names, and icons, as well as user interface objects such as buttons, tabs, and menu items. Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option. You must choose only one of the options. Do not type the braces when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is show ip {alerts|routes}, you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes, but not both. Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions. Do not type the brackets when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is show ip interfaces [-alerts], you can enter either show ip interfaces or
show ip interfaces -alerts.
braces ({})
brackets ([ ])
320985-A
Preface 35
italic text
Indicates variables in command syntax descriptions. Also indicates new terms and book titles. Where a variable is two or more words, the words are connected by an underscore. Example: If the command syntax is show at <valid_route>, valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it. Indicates command syntax and system output, for example, prompts and system messages. Example: Set Trap Monitor Filters Shows menu paths. Example: Protocols > IP identifies the IP command on the Protocols menu. Separates choices for command keywords and arguments. Enter only one of the choices. Do not type the vertical line when entering the command. Example: If the command syntax is show ip {alerts|routes}, you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes, but not both.
separator ( > )
vertical line ( | )
Related publications
For more information about using the Ethernet Switch 325/425, refer to the following publications: Release Notes for the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325/425, Software Release 3.6 (217155-C) Documents important changes about the software and hardware that are not covered in other related publications. Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Describes how to configure Virtual Local Area Networks (VLAN), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and MultiLink Trunk (MLT) features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
System Configuration Guide
36
Preface
Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A) Describes how to configure and manage Quality of Service and IP Filtering features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Describes how to configure and manage security for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) Describes how to configure system logging and network monitoring, and how to display system statistics for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A) Describes how to configure IP Multicast Routing Protocol features for the Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425.
You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free, directly from Internet. Go to www.nortel.com/support. Find the product for which you need documentation. Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product. Use Adobe* Reader* to open the manuals and release notes, search for the sections you need, and print them on most standard printers. Go to www.adobe.com to download a free copy of Adobe Reader.
320985-A
Preface 37
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and tools to address issues with Nortel products. More specifically, the site enables you to: download software, documentation, and product bulletins search the Technical Support web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base for answers to technical issues sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation for Nortel equipment open and manage technical support cases
38
Preface
320985-A
39
This chapter describes the hardware components and features of the Ethernet Switch 325/425, and covers the following topics: New features in software release 3.6 Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 325 on page 57 Hardware components of the Ethernet Switch 425 on page 67 Network configuration examples on page 83 Stack operation on page 87
40
Radius password fallback enhancement on page 45 SNMP trap port enhancement on page 46 EAPoL with Guest VLAN on page 46 shutdown command on page 46 reload command on page 47 show mac-address-table enhancement on page 48 restore factory-default command on page 48 Ping enhancement on page 49 show interfaces config command on page 49 Autosave enable/disable enhancement on page 49 Download without reset on page 50 write memory and save config commands on page 50 Daylight savings time enhancement on page 50 BootP when needed as default on page 51 VLAN tagging enhancement on page 51 VLAN Configuration Control on page 52 Port mirroring configuration rules on page 53
320985-A
41
receives network management information from adjacent stations on the same LAN.
LLDP also makes it possible to discover certain configuration inconsistencies or malfunctions that can result in impaired communications at higher layers. For example, it can be used to discover duplex mismatches between an IP Phone and the connected switch. LLDP is compatible with IETF PROTO MIB (IETF RFC 2922). Figure 1 shows an example of how LLDP works in a network.
Figure 1 LLDP how it works
Router
TM
Management Workstation
IP Phone
1 2 3
The Ethernet Switch and router advertise chassis/port IDs and system descriptions to each other. The devices store the information about each other in local MIB databases, accessible using SNMP. A network management system retrieves the data stored by each device and builds a network topology map.
42
The chassis ID and the port ID values are concatenated to form a logical MSAP identifier that is used by the recipient to identify the sending LLDP agent and port. A non-zero value in the Time to Live (TTL) field of the TTL TLV indicates to the receiving LLDP agent how long the LLDPDU information from the MSAP identifier remains valid. All LLDPDU information is automatically discarded by the receiving LLDP agent if the sender fails to update it in a timely manner. A zero value in TTL field of Time To Live TLV tells the receiving LLDP agent to discard the information associated with the LLDPDU MSAP identifier.
320985-A
43
In addition to the four mandatory TLVs, Release 3.6 software supports the basic management TLV set. You can specify which of these optional TLVs to include in the transmitted LLDPDUs for each port. The optional management TLVs are as follows: Port Description TLV System Name TLV System Description TLV System Capabilities TLV (indicates both the system supported capabilities and enabled capabilities, such as end station, bridge, or router) Management Address TLV
Transmitting LLDPDUs
When a transmit cycle is initiated, the LLDP manager extracts the managed objects from the LLDP local system MIB and formats this information into TLVs. The TLVs are then inserted into the LLDPDU. LLDPDU are regularly transmitted at a user-configurable transmit interval (tx-delay), or when any of the variables contained in the LLPDU is modified on the local system (such as system name or management address). Tx-delay is the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions.
44
Note: With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switches 425-24T and 425-48T have stacking enabled by default, which means that ports 26 and 50, respectively, are disabled by default. This is because the cascade port shares resources with port 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and port 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T. Either the cascade port can be active, or port 26 or 50 can be active. If you want to use port 26 or port 50 in standalone mode, disable stacking and reboot the switch. For more information about stacking the Ethernet Switch 425-48T and Ethernet Switch 425-24T devices, see Stack operation on page 87.
320985-A
45
If you set a password using the cli password command, the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen, or the Password Setting Web-based management page, the next time you log in to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid username. Therefore, ensure you are aware of the valid usernames (default RW and RO) before you change passwords. For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
46
For more information, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
shutdown command
The shutdown CLI command allows you to safely shut down and power off the switch. Once the shutdown command is initiated, the switch saves the current configuration, allowing you to power off the switch within the specified time period (1 to 60 minutes). If the switch is not powered off within the allotted time, the switch performs a reset.
320985-A
47
For more information, see shutdown command for the unit on page 134.
reload command
The reload CLI command provides you with a configuration rollback mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote configurations. The reload command allows you to temporarily disable the autosave feature for a specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you to make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the current saved configuration. During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload command, you must use the copy config nvram, write mem, or save config command to force a manual save of your configurations. Once the reload timer expires, the switch reloads the last saved configuration. To abort the switch reload before the timer expires, you must enter the reload cancel command. The reload command provides you with a safeguard against any misconfigurations when you perform dynamic configuration changes on a remote switch. The following example describes how you can use the reload command to prevent connectivity loss to a remote switch. 1 Enter the CLI command reload force 30. This instructs the switch to reboot in 30 minutes, loading the configuration from NVRAM. During this 30-minute period, autosave of the configuration to NVRAM is disabled. 2 Execute dynamic switch configuration commands, which take effect immediately. These configurations are not saved to NVRAM.
48
If the configurations cause no problems and switch connectivity is maintained, you can perform the following: a b Save the current running configuration using the copy config nvram, write mem, or save config command. Since the new configuration is working properly, cancel the reload using the reload cancel command.
If you make an error when performing configurations in Step 2 that results in the loss of switch connectivity (for example, an error in the IP address mask, MLT configuration, or VLAN trunking), the reload command provides you with a safeguard: when the reload timer expires, the switch reboots to the last saved configuration, and connectivity is re-established. Therefore, you do not have to travel to the remote site to reconfigure the switch. For more information, see reload command on page 136.
320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 restore factory-default [-y]
49
where the [-y] parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation. For more information, refer to Resetting the switch to default configuration on page 261.
Ping enhancement
Release 3.6 software extends the ping capabilities of the device. Using the CLI, you can now specify additional ping parameters, including the number of ICMP packets to be sent, the packet size, the interval between packets, and the timeout. You can also set ping to continuous, or you can set a debug flag to obtain extra debug information. For more information, see Pinging on page 259.
50
320985-A
51
Untag All (Untagged Access) Disabled Tag All (Tagged Trunk) Tag PVID Only Untag PVID Only Enabled Enabled Disabled
The additional options are available using only the Console Interface VLAN Port Configuration screen or the vlan ports CLI command. For more information, refer to Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A).
52
320985-A
53
VLAN Configuration Control is only applied to ports with the tagging modes of Untag All and Tag PVID Only. Ports with the tagging modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only are not governed by VLAN Configuration Control. Ports with the tagging modes of Tag All and Untag PVID Only can belong to multiple VLANs regardless of VLAN Configuration Control settings and must have their PVID manually changed. For more information, refer to Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A).
Other features
SFP GBIC Support on the Ethernet Switch 425
Small Form Factor Pluggable transceivers (SFPs) are hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet ports over various media types. The Ethernet Switch 425 supports the following SFPs: 1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC) 1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: MT-RJ) 1000Base-LX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC) CWDM SFPs
For more information about the SFP GBICs see Appendix A, Installing an SFP Transceiver, on page 409.
54
Autosensing is used when the attached device is not capable of autonegotiation or is using a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802.3u standard. In this case, since it is not possible to sense the duplex mode of the attached device, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 reverts to half-duplex mode. When autonegotiation-capable devices are attached to the Ethernet Switch 325/ 425, the ports negotiate down from 100 Mb/s speed and full-duplex mode until the attached device acknowledges a supported speed and duplex mode. For more information about autosensing and autonegotiation modes, see Chapter 13, Troubleshooting, on page 405.
RFCs
For more information about networking concepts, protocols, and topologies, consult the following RFCs:
320985-A
55
RFC 1573 (Interface MIB) RFC 1643 (Ethernet MIB) RFC 1757 (RMON) RFC 1271 (RMON) RFC 1157 (SNMP)
Standards
The following IEEE Standards also contain information germane to the Ethernet Switch 325/425: IEEE 802.1D (Standard for Spanning Tree Protocol) IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet) IEEE 802.1Q (VLAN Tagging)
56
Console interface The console interface allows you to configure and manage the switch locally or remotely. Access the CI menus and screens locally through a console terminal attached to the Ethernet Switch 325/425, remotely through a dial-up modem connection, or in-band through a Telnet session. For information about the console interface, see Chapter 2, Using the console interface, on page 93.
Command Line Interface (CLI) The CLI is used to automate general management and configuration of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425. Use the CLI through a Telnet connection or through the serial port on the console. See Chapter 3, CLI Basics, on page 119 for more information.
Java-based Device Manager Device Manager is a Java-based set of graphical network management applications used to configure and manage an Ethernet Switch 325/425. See Chapter 4, Getting Started with Device Manager, on page 171 for more information.
Web-based management You can manage the network from the World Wide Web. Access the Web-based Graphical User Interface (GUI) through the Embedded Web Server (EWS), the HTML-based browser located on your network. The GUI allows you to configure, monitor, and maintain your network through Web browsers. You can also download software using the Web. For information about Web-based management, refer to Chapter 5, Using the Web-based management interface, on page 199.
Any generic SNMP-based network management software. You can use any generic SNMP-based network management software to configure and manage an Ethernet Switch 325/425.
Nortel Enterprise Policy Manager The Nortel Enterprise Policy Manager (formerly Optivity Policy Services) allows you to configure the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 with a single system.
320985-A
57
Figure 3 shows the configuration of the front panel on the Ethernet Switch 325. Table 2 describes the components on the front panel.
Figure 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G front panel
1
26
2
25 LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4
Ethernet Switch 325-24G
Console
UI UI Cmd Pwr UI Set Spd Act Spd: 10/100/1000T Spd Act Act: Activity
58
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 2 Components on the Ethernet Switch 325 switch front panel
Item 1 2 3 4 Description UI button 1000T Connectors (not available with Ethernet Switch 325-24T) Port connectors Console port
Note: 1000T connectors are not available for the Ethernet Switch 325-24T.
Console port
The Console port allows you to access the Console Interface (CI) screens and customize your network using the console menu and screens. For more information on using the Console Interface see Chapter 2, Using the console interface, on page 93. The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can use this connector to connect a management station, console, or terminal to the Ethernet Switch 325 by using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 standard serial port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal (for cursor control and to enable cursor and functions keys) to use the console port. Note: The console port is configured as a Data Communications Equipment (DCE) connector. Ensure that your RS-232 cable pinouts are configured for DCE connections. For more information see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425. The default settings of the Console port are:
320985-A
9600 baud with eight data bits One stop bit No parity as the communications format Flow control set to disabled
59
Port connectors
The Ethernet Switch 325 uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connectors. The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port connectors are configured as MDI-X (Media Dependent Interface-crossover). These ports are connected by straight cables to the Network Interface Card (NIC) in a node or a server, similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub. If you are connecting to an Ethernet hub or Ethernet switch, use a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the attached device (For more information see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425). The Ethernet Switch 325 uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb/s (megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s, depending on the connecting device. These ports support the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation standard, which means that when a port is connected to another device which also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard, the two devices negotiate the best speed and duplex mode. The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex mode operation. The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 switch ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s Ethernet segments or nodes. Note: Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable connections when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports. For more information on RJ-45 port connectors see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425 for more information.
60
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Figure 4 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED display panel
26 25 LED StatusAmber:10MpsGreen:100 Mps Blink:Activity StatusOff:Hal LED D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
T: 1000T
A: Activity
Link/Activity Green Amber Green/Flashing Amber/Flashing Off Half/Full Duplex UI Set UI Green Off Button Green/Flashing Green Off UI Cmd Off Green/blinking
Pwr
Green Off
320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 3 Ethernet Switch 325-24G LED descriptions (continued)
Label T Color/Status Green/steady Amber/steady Off A Green/blinking Off Meaning This port is set to operate at 1000 Mb/s, and the link is good. Station connected at 10/100 Mb/s. No link on Copper uplink port. Indicates activity on link. No activity on the link.
61
Back panel
The back panel of the Ethernet Switch 325-24T is shown in Figure 5. Table 4 describes the components on the back panel.
Figure 5 Ethernet Switch 325-24T back panel
1
100-240 V50-60Hz 2A
11110EA
Cooling fans
Two cooling fans are located on one side of the Ethernet Switch 325 to provide cooling for the internal components. (See Figure 2 on page 57). When you install the switch, be sure to allow enough space on both sides of the switch for adequate ventilation. For more information on installing the Ethernet Switch 325, see Installing the Nortel Ethernet Switch 325 (217149-B).
62
AC power receptacle
The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord which is supplied with the switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you have the proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a CEE-22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320-030 specifications. Table 5 lists specifications for international power cords.
Table 5 International power cord specifications
Country/Plug description Continental Europe: CEE7 standard VII male plug Harmonized cord (HAR marking on the outside of the cord jacket to comply with the CENELEC Harmonized Document HD-21) Specifications 220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz Single phase Typical plug
228FA
U.S./Canada/Japan: 100 or 120 VAC 5060 Hz Single phase NEMA5-15P male plug UL recognized (UL stamped on cord jacket) CSA certified (CSA label secured to the cord)
227FA
320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 5 International power cord specifications (continued)
Country/Plug description United Kingdom: BS1363 male plug with fuse Harmonized cord Specifications 240 VAC 50 Hz Single phase Typical plug
63
229FA
230FA
Caution: Please read immediately. Inspect the power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is appropriately certified for use with your electrical system. Immediately discard this power cord if it is inappropriate for your country's electrical system and obtain the proper cord as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances. Refer to this product's technical documentation for detailed installation procedures to be followed by qualified service personnel.
64
Vorsicht: Bitte sofort lesen. Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel ber den richtigen Stecker verfgt und fr die Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel nicht fr das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es nicht verwendet werden. Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die Vorschriften der Zulassungsbehrden in Ihrem Land erfllt. Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthlt ausfhrliche Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal ausgefhrt werden drfen.
Attention: Lisez ceci immdiatement. Examinez ce cordon d'alimentation pour dterminer s'il dispose de la fiche approprie et s'il est bien agr pour utilisation sur votre installation lectrique. Dbarrassez-vous en immdiatement s'il ne convient pas l'utilisation sur le secteur lectrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez-vous un cordon conforme la rglementation nationale en vigueur. Reportez-vous la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des instructions dtailles d'installation, destines un technicien qualifi.
Attenzione: Leggere attentamente. Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il collegamento con la presa appropriata nonch la certificazione per l'uso nell'impianto elettrico posseduto. Non utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato dall'ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica. Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di servizio, consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto.
320985-A
65
Advertencia: Srvase leer inmediatamente. Inspeccione este cable de alimentacin elctrica y determine si viene con el enchufe apropiado y est debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema elctrico. Si no cumple con los reglamentos del sistema elctrico de su pas, despjese de este cable de alimentacin inmediatamente y obtenga el cable requerido, segn las ordenanzas y cdigos elctricos nacionales. Refirase a la documentacin tcnica de este producto para recibir informacin detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones deber seguir.
Caution:
Warning: Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this device. The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency. Vorsicht: Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gert kann nur durch Ziehen des Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, mu sich stets an einem Ort befinden, der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zugnglich ist.
66
Avertissement: Le dbranchement du cordon d'alimentation constitue le seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon d'alimentation doit donc toujours tre branch dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension en cas d'urgence. Advertencia: La nica forma de desconectar la alimentacin de este dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentacin. El cable de alimentacin siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicacin que permita acceder al cable de forma rpida y segura en caso de emergencia. Avvertenza: Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione l'unico sistema per spegnere il dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posizione che permetta l'accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza.
320985-A
67
TM
11107FA
Front panel
Figure 7 shows the configuration of the front panel on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T.
Figure 7 Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel
1
26
2
25 LED Status - Amber:10Mps Green:100 Mps Blink:Activity 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4
LED Status - Off:Half Duplex Green:Full Duplex 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Console
UI
Base M T A M T A
TM
11108EA
68
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 6 Components of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T front panel
Item 1 2 3 4 5 Description UI button 10/100/1000BaseT (copper) port 25 and 26 Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) ports 25 and 26 10/100BaseT ports 1 to 24 Console port
Note: With Release 3.6 software, the Ethernet Switches 425-24T and 425-48T have stacking enabled by default, which means that ports 26 and 50, respectively, are disabled by default. This is because the cascade port shares resources with port 26 on the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and port 50 on the Ethernet Switch 425-48T. Either the cascade port can be active, or port 26 or 50 can be active. If you want to use port 26 or port 50 in standalone mode, disable stacking and reboot the switch.
320985-A
69
70
The color and status of the UI LED returns to steady green once the command has been accepted. If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking. Note: Changing the Base Unit does not take effect until you restart the system.
320985-A
71
To confirm, keep the UI button pressed for 3 seconds more. The UI LED turns either to solid-green (command accepted) or to solid-amber (error). After another period (5 seconds) the UI LED turns Off. Once the command is accepted, the new configuration is stored in NVRAM. Note: When resetting the unit using the UI button, wait 60 seconds after your last configuration change. The system takes up to 60 seconds to save configuration changes to NVRAM. You can reset the stack immediately after changing the configuration using the UI button without losing any of the changed configuration.
Green/steady Amber/blinking Pwr Green Amber/slow blinking Amber/fast blinking Base Green/steady Green/blinking Amber Off Up Green/steady
Amber/blinking
72
Label Down
Amber/blinking
Aborting a command
To abort a command entered using the UI button, do one of the following actions: Wait for about 20 seconds after entering either the one-press (set to base unit) or the two-press (reset to base) and the input is ignored. Press the UI button 7 or more times, which exits the Configuration mode and does not change any settings on the switch.
320985-A
73
If the default IP configuration is set, any change to the configured IP address or subnet mask through the other user interfaces, will cause the In-use IP configuration of the switch or stack to change. Therefore, the newly configured IP address must be used to manage the switch or stack. Note: If there is a change in the switch state, that is, if it joins or exits a stack after the default IP configuration is set, the In-Use IP configuration will change, and must be set again using the UI button. To set the default IP address and subnet mask, do the following: 1 Press the UI button and hold in for 3 seconds. The unit is now in the Configuration mode. The color and status of the UI LED will turn green blinking. 2 Press the UI button five times. The Base LED and the Up and Down LEDs will now be steady amber to indicate that the button press was recognized. 3 Press the UI button and hold in for 3 seconds to confirm the command. The In-Use IP address will now be changed to 192.168.192.168. The color and status of the UI LED will turn to steady green once the command has been accepted. If the command is rejected, the UI LED turns amber blinking.
74
Table 8 describes the LED behavior at the time of setting the default IP address and subnet mask.
Table 8 UI button LED display during change in IP address and subnet mask
Label UI Color/Status Green Status Blinking Description The UI button has been pushed. The front panel configuration mode has been activated. The system is awaiting input. The input has been accepted The input has been rejected The default IP address and subnet mask for this unit or stack has been set to 192.168.192.168.
You cannot set the default IP address through the CLI, SNMP, Console, or WEB interface.
Console port
The Console port allows you to access the Console Interface (CI) screens and customize your network using the Console menu options and screens (see Chapter 2, Using the console interface, on page 93). The Console port is a DB-9, RS-232-D male serial port connector. You can use this connector to connect a management station or console/terminal to the Ethernet Switch 425 by using a straight-through DB-9 to DB-9 standard serial port cable. You must use a VT100/ANSI-compatible terminal (for cursor control and to enable cursor and functions keys) to use the Console port. Note: The Console port is configured as a Data Communications Equipment (DCE) connector. Ensure that your RS-232 cable pinouts are configured for DCE connections (see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425). The Console port default settings are: 9600 baud with eight data bits One stop bit No parity as the communications format
320985-A
75
Port connectors
The Ethernet Switch 425 uses 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connectors. The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX port connectors are configured as MDI-X (media-dependent interface-crossover). These ports are connected using straight cables to the NIC in a node or server, similar to a conventional Ethernet repeater hub. If you are connecting to an Ethernet hub or an Ethernet switch, use a crossover cable unless an MDI connection exists on the associated port of the attached device (see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425). The Ethernet Switch 425 uses autosensing ports designed to operate at 10 Mb/s (megabits per second) or at 100 Mb/s, depending on the connecting device. These ports support the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiation standard, which means that when a port is connected to another device which also supports the IEEE 802.3u standard, the two devices negotiate at the best speed and duplex mode. The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX switch ports also support half- and full-duplex mode operation. The 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX RJ-45 ports can connect to 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s Ethernet segments or nodes. Note: Use only Category 5 copper Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable connections when connecting 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX ports. See Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425 for more information about the RJ-45 port connectors.
76
26
25
10
11
12
13
UI
Base M T A M T A
M:MGBIC T:1000TA:Activity
320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 9 Ethernet Switch 425 LED descriptions (continued)
Label M (MGBIC) Command Status Duplex Mode Color Green State On Off Green T 10/100/1000 (Copper) Mb/s port speed Amber 10/100/ indicator 1000 Link Amber/ Green Off A (Activity) Port activity Green On On On Off Blinking Meaning
77
This port has a good connection (fiber), and is configured to full duplex. This port does not have a good connection (fiber), and port is configured to half duplex. This port has a good connection (copper - at 1000 Mbps). This port has a good connection (copper - at 100 Mbps). This port has a good connection (copper - at 10 Mbps). This port does not have a good connection. Indicates network activity for the corresponding port. A high level of network activity can cause the LEDs to appear to be on continuously.
78
Back panel
Figure 9 shows the back panel of the Ethernet Switch 425.
Figure 9 Ethernet Switch 425 back panel
1 2
11110EA
Cooling fans
Two cooling fans are located on the side of the Ethernet Switch 425 to provide cooling for internal components. (See Figure 6 on page 67.) When you install the switch, ensure that there is adequate space on both sides of the switch for ventilation. For more information on installing the Ethernet Switch 425, see Installing the Ethernet Switch 425 (217150-B).
320985-A
79
AC power receptacle
The AC power receptacle accepts the AC power cord which is supplied with the switch. For installation outside North America, make sure that you have the proper power cord for your region. Any cord used must have a CEE-22 standard V female connector on one end and must meet the IEC 320-030 specifications. Table 11 lists specifications for international power cords.
Table 11 International power cord specifications
Country/Plug description Continental Europe: CEE7 standard VII male plug Harmonized cord (HAR marking on the outside of the cord jacket to comply with the CENELEC Harmonized Document HD-21) Specifications 220 or 230 VAC 50 Hz Single phase Typical plug
228FA
U.S./Canada/Japan: NEMA5-15P male plug UL recognized (UL stamped on cord jacket) CSA certified (CSA label secured to the cord)
227FA
80
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 11 International power cord specifications (continued)
Country/Plug description United Kingdom: BS1363 male plug with fuse Harmonized cord Specifications 240 VAC 50 Hz Single phase Typical plug
229FA
230FA
Caution: Please read immediately. Inspect this power cord and determine if it provides the proper plug and is appropriately certified for use with your electrical system. Immediately discard this cord if it is inappropriate for your country's electrical system and obtain the proper cord as required by your national electrical codes or ordinances. Refer to this product's technical documentation for detailed installation procedures to be followed by qualified service personnel.
320985-A
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Vorsicht: Bitte sofort lesen. Sehen Sie nach, ob dieses Netzkabel ber den richtigen Stecker verfgt und fr die Verwendung in Ihrem Stromversogungsnetz zertifiziert ist. Falls dieses Kabel nicht fr das Stromversorgungsnetz in Ihrem Land geeignet ist, darf es nicht verwendet werden. Besorgen Sie sich ein Kabel, das die Vorschriften der Zulassungsbehrden in Ihrem Land erfllt. Die technische Dokumentation dieses Produkts enthlt ausfhrliche Installationsanweisungen, die nur von qualifiziertem Kundendienstpersonal ausgefhrt werden drfen. Attention: Lisez ceci immdiatement. Examinez ce cordon d'alimentation pour dterminer s'il dispose de la fiche approprie et s'il est bien agr pour utilisation sur votre installation lectrique. Dbarrassez-vous en immdiatement s'il ne convient pas l'utilisation sur le secteur lectrique en usage dans votre pays et procurez-vous un cordon conforme la rglementation nationale en vigueur. Reportez-vous la documentation technique de ce produit pour obtenir des instructions dtailles d'installation, destines un technicien qualifi. Attenzione: Leggere attentamente. Controllare questo cavo di alimentazione, verificarne il collegamento con la presa appropriata nonch la certificazione per l'uso nell'impianto elettrico posseduto. Non utilizzare assolutamente in caso tale cavo non sia adatto al sistema elettrico del paese in cui viene utilizzato e richiederne un altro certificato dall'ente nazionale di fornitura elettrica. Per le procedure di installazione che devono essere seguite dal personale di servizio, consultare questa documentazione tecnica del prodotto. Advertencia: Srvase leer inmediatamente. Inspeccione este cable de alimentacin elctrica y determine si viene con el enchufe apropiado y est debidamente certificado para el uso con su sistema elctrico. Si no cumple con los reglamentos del sistema elctrico de su pas, despjese de este cable de alimentacin inmediatamente y obtenga el cable requerido, segn las ordenanzas y cdigos elctricos nacionales. Refirase a la documentacin tcnica de este producto para recibir informacin detallada sobre los procedimientos que el personal calificado de reparaciones deber seguir.
81
82
Caution:
Warning: Removal of the power cord is the only way to turn off power to this device. The power cord must always be connected in a location that can be accessed quickly and safely in case of an emergency. Vorsicht: Die Stromzufuhr zu diesem Gert kann nur durch Ziehen des Netzstromkabels unterbrochen werden. Die Netzsteckdose, an die das Netzstromkabel angeschlossen ist, mu sich stets an einem Ort befinden, der bei einem Notfall schnell und einfach zugnglich ist. Avertissement: Le dbranchement du cordon d'alimentation constitue le seul moyen de mettre cet appareil hors tension. Le cordon d'alimentation doit donc toujours tre branch dans une prise accessible pour faciliter la mise hors tension en cas d'urgence. Advertencia: La nica forma de desconectar la alimentacin de este dispositivo es desenchufar el cable de alimentacin. El cable de alimentacin siempre debe estar conectado en una ubicacin que permita acceder al cable de forma rpida y segura en caso de emergencia. Avvertenza: Estrarre il cavo di alimentazione l'unico sistema per spegnere il dispositivo. Il cavo di alimentazione deve essere sempre collegato in una posizione che permetta l'accesso facile e sicuro in caso di emergenza.
320985-A
83
10BASE-T hub
Spd Act
Spd Act
Up to 24 users
To Network Center
Up to 24 users
10 Mb/s 100 Mb/s 1000 Mb/s - 23 users share 10 Mb/s (10/24 Mb/s per user) - Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - 24 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth - Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwith
11112EA
84
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Figure 11 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a desktop switch
Before After Ethernet Switch 425-24T
10BASE-T hub
Up to 24 users
To Network Center
Up to 24 users
10 Mb/s 100 Mb/s 1000 Mb/s - 23 users share 10 Mb/s (10/24 Mb/s per user) - Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - 24 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth - Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwith
11112EA
320985-A
85
Server
10BASE-T hubs
UI Set
UI UI Cmd Pwr Spd Act Spd: 10/100/1000T Spd Act Act: Activity
Up to 20 users
Server
Up to 23 users
Up to 23 users
- 88 users share 10 Mb/s (10/88 Mb/s per user) - Server bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) -Total of 88 users
- Three sets of 23 users; each set shares 10 Mb/s (10/23 Mb/s per user) - Addition of 21 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth - Server with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth - Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwidth - Total of 89 users
11113EA
86
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Figure 13 Ethernet Switch 425 used as a segment switch
Before After Server
Up to 20 users
Up to 23 users
Up to 23 users
- 88 users share 10 Mb/s (10/88 Mb/s per user) - Server bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) - Network center bottleneck (10 Mb/s bandwidth) -Total of 88 users
- Three sets of 23 users; each set shares 10 Mb/s (10/23 Mb/s per user) - Addition of 21 users; each with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth - Server with dedicated 100 Mb/s bandwidth - Network center with dedicated 1 Gb/s full-duplex bandwidth - Total of 89 users
11113EA
320985-A
87
As shown in Figure 14, the Ethernet Routing Switch 8600 switch is used as a backbone switch, connecting to the Ethernet Switch 425 with an optional (1000BASE-SX) GBIC for maximum bandwidth. The Ethernet Switch 425-24T and the Ethernet Switch 325-24T have 100 Mb/s connections to the Ethernet Switch 425-24T, a 100BASE-TX hub, and a 100 Mb/s server as well as 10 Mb/s connections to DTE (data terminal equipment).
Figure 14 Configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub
Ethernet Switch325-24G
Console
Ethernet Switch325-24G
Console
Key
UISet
Stack operation
You can connect up to eight units of the Ethernet Switch 425-24T and Ethernet Switch 425-48T to provide uninterrupted connectivity for up to 392 ports. The entire stack can be managed as a single unit with a single IP and MAC address You can select the base unit of the stack by using the momentary switch mechanism. It is recommended that you use only one base unit in the stack and the selection of the same should be done before powering the stack.
88
The Ethernet Switch 425 does not support stack redundancy. In case of cable or unit failure, all units of the stack begin to work as standalone switches. However, the stack is automatically formed again once the missing cable is re-inserted or the faulty unit is replaced. Ethernet units in a stack are interconnected through FireWire cables. Ensure that the downlink connection on a unit is always connected to the Up link of the next unit in the ring.
Base unit
The base unit is the unique unit in the stack that you can configure with the User Interface button on the front panel. A single Ethernet Switch 425-24T or Ethernet Switch 425-48T in the stack must be configured as the base unit. You can assign any unit in the stack as the base unit. The physical order of all other units in the stack is determined by the position of the base unit within the stack. This is important for network management applications that view the physical ordering of the units within the stack. Some characteristics of the base unit are described in the following sections. Note: Only Ethernet Switch 425-24T and Ethernet Switch 425-48T can operate together in the stack mode in release 3.6 software.
Initial installation
During the initial installation of the stack, the software automatically determines the physical order of all units in the stack according to the position of the base unit within the stack. Thereafter, the individual units maintain their original unit numbering, even if you change the position of one or more units in the stack. For example, when you initially power up the stack, the base unit becomes unit 1 and the unit that the base unit connects to becomes unit 2 (and the next unit is unit 3 and so on), until the maximum stack configuration (up to 8 units) is reached. If you change the base unit to another unit in the stack, the new base unit keeps its original unit number in the stack.
320985-A
89
Stack configurations
As shown in Figure 16, the cable connectors provide the ability to stack up to eight switches. Because stack parameters are associated with the base unit (see Base unit on page 88), the physical stack order depends on the base units position and whether the stack is configured stack up or stack down.
Stack up configurations
In Figure 15, data flows from the base unit (unit 1) to the next switch, which is assigned as unit 2, and continues until the last switch in the stack is assigned as unit 8. The physical order of the switches is from top to bottom (unit 1 to unit 8).
90
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Figure 15 Stack up configuration example
Down
Cascade
Down
Up
Unit 1
Cascade Down Up
Unit 2
Cascade Down Up
Unit 3
Cascade Down Up
Unit 4
Cascade Down Up
Unit 5
Cascade Down Up
Unit 6
Cascade Down Up
Unit 7
Cascade
Down
Up
Unit 8
3
Up
320985-A
91
Up
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 8
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 7
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 6
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 5
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 4
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 3
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 2
100-240 V50-60Hz2A
Cascade Down Up
Unit 1
Down
92
Chapter 1 About Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 Table 13 Stack down configuration description (continued)
3 4 Stacking cable 30 cm (order number AL 2018005) Stacking max-return cable 1 m (part number AL 2018006)
Certain Network Management Station (NMS) applications assume a stack up configuration for the GUI which represents the stack (see Figure 15). For this reason, Nortel recommends that you always configure the top unit in the stack as the base unit. In any stack configuration, the following applies: When you apply power to the stack, the base unit initializes and the entire stack powers up as a single logical unit. You can attach an RS-232 communications cable to the console port of any switch in the stack. You can downline upgrade the entire stack from any switch in the stack from the console interface, a Telnet session, the Web-based management interface, or any generic SNMP-based network management software. You can access and manage the stack using a Telnet connection, the Web-based management interface, or any generic SNMP management tool through any switch port that is part of the stack configuration. When you stack three or more switches, use the longer (1-meter) stacking max-return cable to complete the link from the last unit in the stack to the base unit.
320985-A
93
94
To clear a string field: a b Position the cursor in the string field. Press Ctrl+K.
320985-A
95
5 6 7 8
To return to the previous menu, press Ctrl+R. To go to the next screen in a series, press Ctrl+N. To return to the main menu at any time, press Ctrl+C. Press Backspace to delete entered text.
You can set the options that appear in brackets. For example [Enabled].
VLAN Configuration VLAN Port Configuration VLAN Display by Port Traffic Class Configuration
MultiLink Trunk Configuration MultiLink Trunk Utilization IGMP Configuration Display Multicast Group Membership
Spanning Tree Spanning Tree Port Configuration Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings Display Spanning Tree VLAN Membership
1 2
Only appears when the switch is participating in a stack configuration. Only appears when a gigabit is installed in one or more units in a stack configuration.
BS45041F
96
The CI screens for your specific switch model display the model name in the main menu screen title and the correct number of ports and port types in the Port Configuration screen. Note: The field values shown in the CI screens in this section are provided as examples only.
Main menu
This section describes the options available from the CI main menu (Figure 18). The CI screens and submenus for these options are described in the following sections. Note: Some menu options shown in this main menu example and in other screen examples in this chapter may not appear on your screen, depending on the switch options installed. However, the full menu options are shown in the screen examples and described in the following sections.
320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface Figure 18 Console interface main menu
Ethernet Switch 425-48T Main Menu IP Configuration/Setup... SNMP Configuration... System Characteristics... Switch Configuration... Console/Comm Port Configuration... Display Hardware Units... Spanning Tree Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Software Download... Configuration File... Display System Log... Reset... Reset to Default Settings... Shutdown Command... Command Line Interface... Logout...
97
98
Switch Configuration...
Display Hardware Units Displays the Display Hardware Unit Information screen (see Hardware Unit Information screen on page 233). This screen displays the switch model and the software version running. The screen also displays the SPF GBIC. Spanning Tree Configuration... Displays the Spanning Tree Configuration Menu (see Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options: Spanning Tree Group Configuration, Spanning Tree Port Configuration, Display Spanning Tree Switch Settings, Display Spanning Tree VLAN Membership Displays the TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen (see TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen on page 234). This screen allows you to set your switch to enable a user at a remote console terminal to Configuration... communicate with the Ethernet Switch 325/425 as if the console terminal were directly connected to it. You can have up to four active Telnet sessions running at one time in either a standalone switch or a stack configuration. Software Download... Displays the Software Download screen (see Software Download screen on page 237). This screen allows you to revise the Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image and diagnostics images that are located in nonvolatile flash memory. Displays the Configuration File Download/Upload screen (see Configuration File Download/Upload screen on page 240). This screen allows you to store your switch/stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server. You can retrieve the configuration parameters for automatically configuring a replacement switch or stack with the same configuration when required. This screen also allows you to download the ASCII configuration file from a TFTP server to the switch or stack.
Configuration File
320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface Table 14 Console interface main menu options (continued)
Option Display System Log Reset Description
99
Displays the System Log screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)). Resets the switch with the current configuration settings. This option is followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action. Enter Yes to reset the switch; enter No to abort the option: If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, you can reset the entire stack. When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo screen. Press Ctrl+Y to access the Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu. Resets the switch to the factory default configuration settings. This option is followed by a screen prompt that precedes the action. Enter Yes to reset the switch to the factory default configuration settings; enter No to abort the option: If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, you can reset the entire stack. When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo screen. Press Ctrl+Y to access the Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu. Caution: If you choose the Reset to Default Settings option, all configured settings are replaced with factory default settings when you press [Enter] Achtung: Bei Auswahl des Befehls zur Rcksetzung auf die Standardeinstellungen werden alle von Ihnen konfigurierten Einstellungen durch die werkseitigen Standardeinstellungen ersetzt, wenn Sie die Eingabetaste drcken. Attention: Si vous restaurez la configuration usine, votre configuration courante sera remplace par la configuration usine ds que vous appuierez sur [Entre]. Precaucin: Si selecciona el comando Restaurar valores predeterminados, todos los valores de configuracin se sustituirn por las valores predeterminados en fbrica al pulsar [Intro]. Attenzione: Nel caso in cui si selezioni la reimpostazione dei valori di default, tutte le impostazioni configurate verranno sostituite dai default di fabbrica premendo il tasto [Invio].
100
The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to poweroff the stack. Configuration changes will not be saved. Shutdown has blocked the flash. Autoreset in <xxxx> seconds.
Neither Web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown warning messages. Command Line Interface Logout Displays the prompt to execute the CLI commands. Allows a user in a Telnet session or a user working at a password-protected console terminal to terminate the session.
320985-A
101
Operation Mode:
Switch
MAC Address: Reset Count: Last Reset Type: Power Status: Local GBIC Type: sysDescr: sysObjectID: sysUpTime: sysServices: sysContact: sysName: sysLocation:
00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80 9 Management Reset Primary Power port 49, None port 50, None Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1 7 days, 17:49:05 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized. 3 [ ] [ Ethernet 428-48T ] [ ]
Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Size of Stack
Base Unit
102
A read-only field that indicates the last type of reset. Default Value Range Power Cycle Power Cycle, Software Download, Management Reset, Management Factory Reset
Power Status
A read-only field that indicates the current power source (primary, RPSU, or both). Default Value Range Primary Power Primary Power, Redundant Power, Primary and Redundant Power
A read-only field that indicates the GBIC type that is configured in this unit. (This field is applicable only to the Ethernet Switch 425). A read-only field that specifies hardware and software versions. A read-only field that provides a unique identification of the switch, which contains the vendors private enterprise number. A read-only field that shows the length of time since the last reset. Note that this field is updated when the screen is redisplayed. A read-only field that displays the current date and time and the configured time offset from Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). A read-only field that indicates the switchs physical and data link layer functionality. The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch. Default Value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysName
A name that uniquely identifies the switch. Default Value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysLocation
The physical location of the switch. Default Value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters
320985-A
103
1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station (NMS), only 56 characters are displayed on the console terminal.
MAC Address Table MAC Address Security Configuration... EAPOL Security Configuration... VLAN Configuration... Port Configuration... High Speed Flow Control Configuration... MultiLink Trunk Configuration... Port Mirroring Configuration... Rate Limiting Configuration... IGMP Configuration... Display Port Statistics Clear All Port Statistics Return to Main Menu Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Note: The Ethernet Switch 325 does not support the High Speed flow control feature.
104
and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to view
all MAC addresses and their associated port or trunk that the switch has learned, or to search for a particular MAC address (to see if the switch has learned the address). MAC Address Security Configuration... Displays the MAC Address Security Configuration Menu (see
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to set up the MAC
address security feature and provides the following options: MAC Address Security Configuration, MAC Address Security Port Configuration, MAC Address Security Port Lists, and MAC Address Security Table. This menu allows you to enable and disable security features on the port and trunk levels.
Displays the EAPOL Security Configuration Menu (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel
Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)). This screen allows you to set up
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)- based security. VLAN Configuration... Displays the VLAN Configuration Menu (see Configuring
VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options:
VLAN Configuration, VLAN Port Configuration, VLAN Display by Port, MAC-SA, and Return to Switch Configuration Menu screen. This menu allows you to create and modify VLANs. Port Configuration... Displays the Port Configuration screen (see Port Configuration screen on page 109). This screen allows you to configure a specific switch port, all switch ports or, when in a stack configuration, all stack ports. Displays the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen. (see High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen on page 112).
320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface Table 16 Switch Configuration Menu options (continued)
Option Description
105
MultiLink Trunk Configuration... Displays the MultiLink Trunk Configuration Menu (see
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)). This menu provides the following options:
MultiLink Trunk Configuration and MultiLink Trunk Utilization. This menu allows you to create and modify trunks, and to monitor the bandwidth utilization of configured trunks. Port Mirroring Configuration... Displays the Port Mirroring Configuration screen (see System
Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)). This screen allows you to
designate a single switch port as a traffic monitor for one specific port. Rate Limiting Configuration Displays the Rate Limiting Configuration screen (Rate Limiting Configuration screen on page 115). This screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets at ingress. Displays the IGMP Configuration screen (Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A)). This screen allows you to optimize multicast traffic by setting up IGMP port memberships that filter multicast on a per port basis Display Port Statistics Displays the Port Statistics screen (see System Monitoring Guide
IGMP Configuration
for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)). This screen allows you to view detailed
information about any switch port. Clear All Port Statistics Allows you to clear all port statistics. This option is followed by screen prompts that precede a choice of the actions: If the switch is operating standalone, choose one of the following: Yes, to clear all port statistics for all switch ports No, to abort the option If the switch is participating in a stack configuration, choose one of the following: Clear all port statistics for a specific unit in the stack Clear all port statistics for the entire stack No, to abort the option
106
320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface Figure 21 MAC Address Security Port Lists screen
MAC Address Security Port Lists Entry ----S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 Port List --------[ ] [ ]
107
[1/3,2/7,3/1-4] [ [ [ [ ] ] ] ] More...
Press Ctrl-N to display next screen. Enter port list, NONE,ALL,1,3,7-9, press <Return> or <Enter> when done. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
108
The port number list from the previous entry is copied into the new field.
320985-A
109
Note: The Autonegotiation fields, the Speed fields, and the Duplex fields are independent of MultiLink Trunking, VLANs, and the STP. To open the Port Configuration screen:
110
Press Ctrl-N to display next screen. Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
320985-A
111
Autonegotiation Speed Duplex --------------- ----------------[ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] [ Enabled ] [ ] More...
Press Ctrl-N to display next screen. Press Ctrl-P to display previous screen. Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Port
Trunk
112
A read-only field that indicates the current link state of the corresponding port, as follows: Up: The port is connected and operational. Down: The port is not connected or is not operational. Allows you to control whether link up/link down traps are sent to the configured trap sink from the switch. Default Value Range On On, Off
LnkTrap
Autonegotiation
When enabled, sets the corresponding port speed to match the best service provided by the connected station, up to 100 Mb/s in full-duplex mode. This field is disabled for all fiber optic ports. Default Value Range Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Speed/Duplex
Allows you to manually configure any port to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s, in half- or full-duplex mode. This field is set (by default) to 1000 Mb/s, full-duplex for Gigabit ports only. Default Value Range 10Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled) 10Mbs/Half, 10Mbs/Full, 100Mbs/Half, 100Mbs/Full
Choose High Speed Flow Control Configuration (or press h) from the
Switch Configuration Menu screen.
320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface Figure 24 High Speed Flow Control Configuration
High Speed Flow Control Configuration
113
Port ---49 50
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Table 18 describes the High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields.
Table 18 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen fields
Field Unit Description Allows you to select the unit number (when stacking is configured) to view or configure. To view or configure another unit, type its unit number and press Enter, or press the spacebar to toggle the unit numbers (the system only displays a screen for units that are configured with a Gigabit MDA). This field is not visible if the switch is operating in the standalone mode. Displays the port number
Port
114
Displays if a port is configured to support an Ethernet speed of 10 Mb/s or 100 Mb/s, in half- or full-duplex mode. This field is set (by default) to 1000 Mb/s, full-duplex for Gigabit ports only. Default Range 100Mbs/Half (when Autonegotiation is Disabled) 10Mbs/Half, 10Mbs/Full, 100Mbs/Half, 100Mbs/Full
Flow Control
Indicates if the switch or unit has been configured to control traffic and avoid congestion on the Gigabit MDA port. Two modes are available (see Choosing a high speed flow control mode, next, for details about the two modes). The Flow Control field cannot be configured unless you set the Autonegotiation field value to Disabled. Default Value Range Disabled Disabled, Symmetric, Asymmetric
Note: All fields (except the Unit field) described in Table 18 are read-only fields.
Symmetric mode
This mode allows both the GBIC port and its link partner to send flow control pause frames to each other.
320985-A
115
When a pause frame is received (by either the GBIC port or its link partner), the port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause-release control frame is received. Both devices on the link must support this mode when it is selected.
Asymmetric mode
This mode allows the link partner to send flow control pause frames to the GBIC port. When a pause frame is received, the receiving port suspends transmission of frames for a number of slot times specified in the control frame or until a pause-release control frame is received. In this mode, the GBIC port is disabled from transmitting pause frames to its link partner. Use this mode when the GBIC port is connected to a buffered repeater device. You can choose a high speed flow control mode using CLI commands. For more information about the commands see Enabling flow control on page 326.
116
The Rate Limiting Configuration screen allows you to limit the forwarding rate of broadcast and multicast packets at ingress. Note: All configuration settings that you make in the Rate Limiting Configuration screen are applied across the entire unit (if stacking in configured). You cannot set some ports in the unit to limit broadcast traffic with a value of X pps (Packets Per Second) and some other ports in the same unit to limit multicast traffic with a value of Y pps. Figure 25 show sample rate limiting values for the two Rate Limiting Configuration screens. To open the Rate Limiting Configuration screen:
320985-A
Chapter 2 Using the console interface Figure 25 Rate Limiting Configuration screen
Rate Limiting Configuration Packet Type ------------[ [ Both Both Limit -------] [ 0 pps ] ] [ 0 pps ]
117
---Switch Stack
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
118
Allows you to enable Rate Limiting on current selected unit. Allows you to enable Rate Limiting on an entire stack. This field is visible only if stacking has been configured.
When the volume of either packet type is high, placing severe strain on the network (often referred to as a storm), you can set the forwarding rate of those packet types to not exceed a specified percentage of the total available bandwidth. The percentage you set refers to the total available bandwidth, not to a percentage of current traffic.
320985-A
119
The Ethernet Switch 325/425 Command Line Interface (CLI) is a management tool that provides methods for configuring, managing, and monitoring the operational functions of the switch. You can access CLI through a direct connection to the switch console port, or remotely using Telnet. For a complete, alphabetical list of CLI commands, refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447. You can use the CLI interactively, or you can load and execute CLI scripts. CLI scripts are loaded in one of the following ways: Entering the configure network command Manually loading the script in the console menu Automatically loading the script at boot-up
This chapter discusses the following CLI topics: CLI command modes Port numbering on page 123 Accessing CLI on page 125 Setting the system username and password on page 127 Getting help on page 128
System Configuration Guide
Basic navigation on page 128 Managing basic system information on page 137 Managing MAC address forwarding database table on page 143
The User EXEC mode is the default mode; it is also referred to as exec. This command mode is the initial mode of access on powering-up the Ethernet Switch 325/425. In this command mode, the user can access only a subset of the total CLI commands; however, the commands in this mode are available while the user is in any of the other four modes. The commands in this mode are those you would generally need, such as ping and logout. Commands in the Privileged EXEC mode are available to all other modes but the User EXEC mode. The commands in this mode allow you to perform basic switch-level management tasks, such as downloading the software image, setting passwords, and booting the Ethernet Switch 325/425. The Privileged EXEC mode is also referred to as privExec mode. The Global Configuration mode and the Interface Configuration mode allow you to change the configuration of the Ethernet Switch 325/425. Changes made in these command modes are immediately applied to the switch configuration and saved to NVRAM. The Global Configuration commands allow you to set and display general configurations for the switch, such as the IP address, SNMP parameters, the Telnet access, and VLANs. The Global Configuration mode is also referred to as config mode.
320985-A
The Interface Configuration commands allow you to configure parameters for each port, such as speed and duplex mode. The Interface Configuration mode is also referred to as config-if mode. Figure 26 provides an illustration of the hierarchy of Ethernet Switch 325/425 CLI command modes.
Figure 26 CLI command mode hierarchy
10194EA
You can see a specific value for each command mode at the prompt line, and you can use specific commands to enter or exit each command mode (Table 20). Additionally, you can only enter command modes from specific modes and only exit to specific command modes.
325-24T>
425-48T>
425-48T#
logout or exit to
quit to Main Menu Global Configuration (config)
325-24T(config)#
425-48T(config)#
configure to enter
from Privileged EXEC mode end or exit to exit to Privileged EXEC mode; logout to quit to Main Menu
325-24T(config-if)# 425-48T(config-if)#
The prompt displays the switch name, and the current CLI command mode. For example: User EXEC425-48T> Privileged EXEC425-48T# Global Configuration425-48T(config)# Interface Configuration425-48T(config-if)#
Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447, for a complete, alphabetical list of all CLI commands and where they are explained.
320985-A
The initial command mode in CLI depends on your access level when you logged into the Ethernet Switch 325/425 CI menus: With no password protection, you can enter the CLI in userExec mode, and use the enable command to move to the privExec command mode. If you have logged into the CI menus with read-only access, you can enter the CLI in userExec mode and cannot access any other CLI command modes. If you have logged into the CI menus with read-write access, you can enter the CLI in privExec mode and use the commands to move to the other command modes.
Port numbering
The port numbering for different versions of Ethernet switches are listed below: Ethernet Switch 325-24T has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports. Ethernet Switch 325-24G has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports and two 10/100/1000 ports. Ethernet Switch 425-24T has twenty-four 10/100 Mb/s ports on the front, as well as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports 10/100/1000Mbps. Ethernet Switch 425-48T has forty-eight 10/100 ports on the front, as well as two combo ports, which includes two GBIC or two copper ports 10/100/1000Mbps.
The CLI uses the variable <portlist> when a command specifies one or more ports for the command. Note: The Ethernet Switch 425-24T operates either in standalone mode or in stack mode. The format of the variable <portlist> is different if you are working on a standalone Ethernet Switch 425-24T or a stack.
You can also use the unit/port convention discussed in Port numbering in stacked mode, with a standalone Ethernet Switch 325/425 as long as the unit number is 1.
320985-A
Example: 3/24 means unit 3, port 24 A range of port numbersan integer for the unit, followed by /, and integers for the port number between 1 and 24 separated by a dash Example: 1/1-3 means unit 1, ports 1, 2, and 3 Example: 3/5-24 means unit 3, port 5 through port 24 A unit with no ports specifiedan integer for the unit, followed by /, and the word none. 3/none means unit 3 with no ports A unit with all ports specifiedan integer for the unit, followed by /, and the word all. 3/all means unit 3 with all ports A list of port numbers, port ranges, and/or units with all ports or no ports using the unit/port formatseparated by commas Example: 1/1,2/3,3/7 means unit 1 port 1; unit 2, port 3; and unit 3, port 7 Example: 1/1-3,3/9-11 means unit 1, ports 1, 2, 3; and unit 3, ports 9, 10, and 11 Example: 1/1,4/3-5,5/9-11,7/15 means unit 1, port 1; unit 4, ports 3, 4, 5; unit 5, ports 9, 10, 11; and unit 7, port 15 Example: 1/3,3/ALL,4/NONE means unit 1, port 3; unit 3, all ports; and unit 4, no ports none means no ports in the stack. all means all the ports in the stack, including all GBIC ports.
To view the unit numbers in the stack, issue the show stack-info command (show stack-info command on page 141). You must be in the Privileged EXEC (privExec) mode to execute this command.
Accessing CLI
You access the CI menus using Telnet or through a direct connection to the switch from a terminal or personal computer (PC). You can use any terminal or PC with a terminal emulator as the CLI command station. Make sure that the terminal has the following features: 9600 bits per second (b/s), 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, no flow control
System Configuration Guide
Serial terminal-emulation program such as Terminal or Hyperterm for Windows* 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows NT*. Cable and connector to match the male DTE connector (DB-9) on the Ethernet Switch 325/425 console port, with the DCE/DTE switch on the switch management module set to DTE VT100 Arrows checked in the Terminal Preferences window under Terminal Options, and Block Cursor unchecked; VT-100/ANSI checked under Emulation.
To access CLI: 1 When you access the Ethernet Switch 325/425, the banner appears (Figure 27).
Enter Ctrl-Y to begin. *************************************************************** *** Ethernet Switch 425-48T *** *** Nortel *** *** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved *** *** Release 3.6 SSH *** *** HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 *** ***************************************************************
Press Ctrl+Y, and the Main Menu appears on the console screen (Figure 28) with the top line highlighted.
320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 127 Figure 28 Main Menu for Ethernet Switch 425-48T console interface
Ethernet Switch 425-48T Main Menu IP Configuration/Setup... SNMP Configuration... System Characteristics... Switch Configuration... Console/Comm Port Configuration... Display Hardware Units... Spanning Tree Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Software Download... Configuration File... Display System Log... Reset... Reset to Default Settings... Shutdown Command... Command Line Interface... Logout... Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option.
Using the Down Arrow key, scroll down to Command Line Interface, and press Enter. The CLI prompt appears:
425-48T>
The > sign at the end of the name of the switch indicates that the default CLI mode is User EXEC mode. Refer to CLI command modes on page 120, to select the command mode you want to use (and are authorized to use).
Getting help
When you navigate through the CLI, online Help is available at all levels. Entering a portion of the command, space, and a question mark (?) at the prompt results in a list of all options for that command. Refer to help command on page 130 for more information about the specific types of Help.
Basic navigation
This section discusses basic navigation around the CLI and between the command modes. As you see, the CLI incorporates various shortcut commands and keystrokes to simplify its use. The following topics are covered in this section: General navigation commands Keystroke navigation on page 129 help command on page 130 no command on page 131 default command on page 131 logout command on page 132 enable command on page 132 configure command on page 132 interface command on page 133 disable command on page 133 end command on page 134 exit command on page 134
320985-A
The system records the last command in a CLI session. However, the last command is not saved across reboots. Add the word no to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to clear or remove the parameters of the actual command. For example, when you enter the command ip stack address 192.32.154.126, you set the IP stack address. However, when you enter no ip stack address, the system returns the IP address to zero. Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447 for an alphabetical list of no commands. Add the word default to the beginning of most CLI configuration commands to set the parameters of the command to the factory default values. Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447 for an alphabetical list of default commands. When you enter a portion of the command and press the [Tab] key, the system finds the first unambiguous match of a command and displays that command. For example, if you enter down+[Tab], the system displays download.
Keystroke navigation
You can change the location of the cursor using the key combinations shown in Table 21.
Table 21 Keystroke navigation
Key combination Function Start of line Back 1 character Abort command Delete the character indicated by the cursor End of line Forward 1 character Delete character left of cursor (Backspace key) Command/parameter completion Redisplay line Next history command
help command
The help command is in all command modes and displays a brief message about using the CLI help system. The syntax for the help command is:
help
The help command has no parameters or variables. Figure 29 shows the output from the help command.
320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 131 Figure 29 help command output in privExec mode
425-48T>help Context help may be requested at any point in a command by entering a question mark '?'. If nothing matches, the help list will be empty and you must backup until entering a '?' shows the available options. Two styles of help are provided: 1. Full help is available when you are ready to enter a command argument (e.g. 'show?') and describes each possible argument. 2. Partial help is provided when an abbreviated argument is entered and you want to know what arguments match the input (e.g. 'show pr?'.)
no command
The no command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command, and it negates the action performed by that command. The effect of the no command is to remove or to clear the configuration controlled by the specified command. Various no commands are in the config and config-if command modes. Refer to Appendix E, Command List, on page 447 for an alphabetical listing of all no commands. Note: Not all configuration commands support the no prefix command.
default command
The default command is always used as a prefix to a configuration command, and it restores the configuration parameters to default values. The default values are specified by each command. Refer to Appendix A for an alphabetical listing of all default commands. Note: Not all commands support the default prefix command.
logout command
The logout command logs you out of the CLI session and returns you to the Main Menu of the Console Interface (CI) menus (Figure 28). The syntax for the logout command is:
logout
The logout command is in all command modes. The logout command has no parameters or variables.
enable command
The enable command changes the command mode from User EXEC to privExec mode. The syntax for the enable command is:
enable
The enable command is in the exec command mode. The enable command has no parameters or variables.
configure command
The configure command moves you to the Global Configuration (config) command mode and identifies the source for the configuration commands. The syntax for the configure command is:
configure {terminal|network}
320985-A
Table 22 describes the parameters and variables for the configure command.
Table 22 configure command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables terminal | network Description Specifies the source for the configuration commands for the Ethernet Switch 325/425: terminalallows you to enter config mode to enter configuration commands networkallows you to set up parameters for auto-loading a script at boot-up or for loading and executing a script immediately
interface command
The interface command moves you to the Interface Configuration (config-if) command mode. The syntax for the interface command is:
interface FastEthernet <portlist>
The interface command is in the config command mode. Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.
Table 23 interface command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <portlist> Description Specifies the portlist you want to be affected by all the commands issued in the config-if command mode.
disable command
The disable command returns you to the User EXEC (exec) command mode. The syntax for the disable command is:
disable
The disable command is in the privExec command mode. The disable command has no parameters or variables.
System Configuration Guide
end command
The end command moves you to the priv Exec mode from either the Global Configuration (config) mode or the Interface Configuration (config-if) mode. The syntax for the end command is:
end
exit command
The exit command moves you around the command modes: In User EXEC (exec) and Privileged EXEC (privExec) command modes, exit allows you to quit the CLI session. In Global Configuration (config) mode, exit moves you back to the privExec command mode. In Interface Configuration (config-if) command mode, exit moves you back to the config mode.
Enter yes at this prompt to shut down the switch. The following warning message then appears:
Warning the switch/stack has been set to reboot in <xx> minutes. Current configuration has been saved, no further configuration changes can be saved until reboot occurs or 'shutdown cancel' command is issued.
Once the shutdown command is initiated, all existing and subsequent Console Interface sessions display the following message:
Stack will reset in <xxxx> seconds.
While existing CLI sessions do not receive a warning message, all subsequent CLI sessions display the following message:
The shutdown process is in progress. It is safe to poweroff the stack. Configuration changes will not be saved. Shutdown has blocked the flash. Autoreset in <xxxx> seconds.
Neither Web-based management nor Device Manager receive any shutdown warning messages.
Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown command.
Table 24 shutdown command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables force minutes-to-wait <1-60>] cancel Description Instructs the switch to skip the shutdown confirmation prompt. Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch resets itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes. Aborts all scheduled switch shutdowns
Note: Any configurations or logins performed on the switch after the shutdown command is initiated are not saved to NVRAM and are lost after the reset. The shutdown command is in the privExec command mode.
reload command
The reload command provides you with a configuration rollback mechanism to prevent loss of connectivity to a switch, typically for remote configurations. The reload command allows you to temporarily disable the autosave feature for a specified time period (1 to 60 minutes), allowing you to make a number of configuration changes on remote switches without affecting the current saved configuration. During the interval in which the autosave feature is disabled by the reload command, you must use the copy config nvram command to force a manual save of your configurations. Initiate the reload command before you start the switch configuration commands. Once you initiate the command in the CLI, the following message appears:
Reload (y/n) ?
Enter yes at this prompt to set the switch reload. The following warning message then appears:
320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 137 Warning the switch/stack has been set to reload in <xx> minutes. Current configuration has NOT been saved. Configuration must be explicitly saved.
Once the reload timer expires, the switch resets, reloads the last saved configuration, and re-enables the autosave feature. The syntax for the reload command is:
reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel]
Table 23 describes the parameters and variables for the interface command.
Table 25 reload command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables force minutes-to-wait <1-60>] cancel Description Instructs the switch to skip the reload confirmation prompt. Specifies the number of minutes that pass before the switch reloads itself. The default wait time is set at 10 minutes. Aborts all scheduled switch reloads
The show sys-info command is in the privExec command mode. The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables. Figure 30 displays sample output from the show sys-info command.
Figure 30 show sys-info command output
425-48T#show sys-info Operation Mode: Switch MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80 Reset Count: 34 Last Reset Type: Power Cycle Power Status: Primary Power Autotopology: Enabled Local GBIC Type: (port 49) GBIC is missing Local GBIC Type: (port 50) GBIC is missing sysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 Mfg Date: 05122004 Serial #: SACC2600E5 Operational State:Normal sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1 sysUpTime: 2 days, 17:26:24 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized. sysServices: 3 sysContact: c sysName: Ethernet 425-48T sysLocation: 425-48T#
To change the system contact, name, or location, refer to the snmp-server command (see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).
320985-A
The show tech command is in the privExec command mode. The show tech command has no parameters or variables. Figure 31, Figure 31 on page 139, and Figure 32 on page 140 display a sample output from the show tech command.
Figure 31 show tech command output
425# show tech *****SYS Info***** System Information: Operation Mode: MAC Address: Reset Count: Last Reset Type: Autotopology: sysObjectID: sysUpTime: sysNtpTime: sysServices: sysContact: sysName: sysLocation: Unit #1: Switch Model: MDA Model: Cascade Module: Hardware Version: Firmware Version: Software Version: Serial Number: Manufacturing Date: Power Status: Fan #1 Status: Fan #2 Status: *****UI Button***** Unit # Button Mode ------ ------------1 Enabled
Switch 00-09-97-A2-9D-80 123 Management Reset Enabled 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.2 2 days, 04:41:28 SNTP not synchronized. 3 425
425-24T None 400-ST1 0B 3.5.0.2 v3.6.0 SACC25003U 05232003 Primary Normal Normal
140 Chapter 3 CLI Basics Figure 32 show tech command output (continued)
*****MEMORY INFORMATION***** status bytes blocks avg block max block ------ --------- -------- ---------- ---------current free 3384136 154 21974 3333064 alloc 7077632 4335 1632 cumulative alloc 1036033356 11295553 91 *****IP Configuration***** BootP Mode: BootP Disabled Configured In Use Last BootP --------------- --------------- --------------Stack IP Address: 192.168.100.100 0.0.0.0 Switch IP Address: 192.168.100.13 192.168.100.13 0.0.0.0 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 Default Gateway: 192.168.100.1 192.168.100.1 0.0.0.0 *****MLT Configuration***** Trunk Name Members Bpdu Mode Status ----- -------------------- ------------------- ------ ------ -------1 Trunk #1 NONE All basic Disabled 2 Trunk #2 NONE All basic Disabled 3 Trunk #3 NONE All basic Disabled 4 Trunk #4 NONE All basic Disabled 5 Trunk #5 NONE All basic Disabled 6 Trunk #6 NONE All basic Disabled *****VLAN Configuration***** Id Name Type Protocol User PID Active Mgmt --- -------------------- -------- ---------------- -------- ------ ---1 VLAN #1 Port None 0x0000 Yes Yes Port Members: 1-25 *****STP Configuration***** Current STP Operation Mode: MSTP Maximum Mst Instance Number: 8 Number of Msti Supported: 1 Cist Bridge Priority (hex): 8000 Stp Version: Mstp Mode Cist Bridge Max Age: 20 seconds Cist Bridge Forward Delay: 15 seconds Tx Hold Count: 3 Path Cost Default Type: 32-bit Max Hop Count: 2000
320985-A
Chapter 3 CLI Basics 141 Figure 33 show tech command output (continued)
VLAN members ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ ------ -----1 Msti Config Id Selector: 0 Msti Region Name: 00:0f:6a:7d:bb:e0 Msti Region Version: 0 Msti Config Digest: AC:36:17:7F:50:28:3C:D4:B8:38:21:D8:AB:26:DE:62 Port Role State STP Status Oper Status ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------1 Root Forwarding Enabled Enabled 2 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled 3 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled [...] 24 Designated Forwarding Enabled Enabled 25 Disabled Discarding Enabled Disabled *****Port Interface***** Status Auto Flow Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control ---- ----- ------- ---- ---- -------- ----------- -------- ------ ------1 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full 2 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled 3 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled [...] 24 Enable Up Up Enabled Enabled 100Mbps Full 25 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled *****System Log***** Type Time Idx Src Message ---- ----------------------------- ---- --- ------S 00:00:00:00 1 NVR Base Unit changed S 00:00:00:00 2 NVR #1 Reset initiated through telnet by IP address: 11.127.249.74, access mode: no security S 00:00:00:00 3 NVR SMGR event JOIN STACK
The show stack-info command is in the privExec command mode. The show stack-info command has no parameters or variables. Figure 34 displays sample output from the show stack-info command.
Figure 34 show stack-info command output
425-24T(config)#show stack-info Unit # Switch Model GBIC Port ------ ---------------- ----------1 425-24T (1/25) SX 2 425-24T (2/25) None 425-24T(config)#
The show stacking-mode command is in the exec command mode. The show stacking-mode command has no parameters or variables.
320985-A
The renumber unit command is in the config command mode. The renumber unit command has no parameters or variables. Note: This command does not take effect until you reset the stack.
The show mac-address-table command is in the privExec command mode. Table 26 describes the parameters and variables for the show
mac-address-table command. Table 26 show mac-address-table command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables vid <1-4094> Description Enter the number of the VLAN you want to display the forwarding database. Default is to display the management VLANs database. Displays the time in seconds after which an unused entry is removed from the forwarding database. Displays a specific MAC address if it exists in the database. Enter the MAC address you want displayed. List of ports. Allows you to filter the results of the command by printing only those entries in the address table that include or exclude a given pattern. The value for <pattern> must be a sequence of 1 to 6 bytes in hex, separated by dashes. for example: show mac-address-table
320985-A
The mac-address-table aging-time command is in the config command mode. Table 27 describes the parameters and variables for the mac-address-table aging-time command.
Table 27 mac-address-table aging-time command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables time Description
Enter the aging time in seconds that you want for MAC addresses before they are flushed.
The default mac-address-table aging-time command is in the config command mode. The default mac-address-table aging-time command has no parameters or variables.
320985-A
147
Installing JDM on Windows on page 149 Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux on page 159 Starting Device Manager on page 171
Note: Do not install the JDM to a directory where a previous version of Device Manager software already exists.
JDM saves the IP addresses that are visited to a settings file. A JDM uninstall operation does not remove this settings file. In a Windows environment, the settings file is dm.ini, and is created in the JDM install directory. In a UNIX environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.ini. In a Linux environment, the settings file is ~/.jdm/dm.ini. The dm.ini file containing IP addresses visited from a previous JDM version is automatically used by a new JDM version installed in the same directory. You must manually move or copy the dm.ini file from a previous version of JDM to a new JDM installation in a different directory.
320985-A
If you decide to allow previous versions of JDM to remain, then you must choose a different folder to use during the installation process. Remove existing versions of Device Manager software by using the Uninstall DM option that was created in the Windows Start menu during installation. For example, to remove Device Manager from a Windows XP system using the default program group, choose the following option from the Windows Start menu: All Programs>Nortel>Java Device Manager>Uninstall DM. If no program group was added to the Windows Start menu during installation, then complete the following steps to remove existing Device Manager software: 1 2 3 Navigate to the folder where the JDM software is installed. Open the UninstallerData sub-folder. Run the following file: Uninstall Java Device Manager.exe.
Note: If more than one version of Device Manager software is installed, ensure you select the correct software to uninstall.
5 6
On the CD-ROM drive, locate the \Windows\Device Manager subdirectory. Double-click the jdm_xxxx.exe file. Note: In the file name, xxxx represents the current version of the JDM software. Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on Windows on page 152.
Click Next to begin the installation process. The License Agreement dialog box opens.
320985-A
Click Next. The Choose Install Set dialog box opens (Figure 40).
Do one of the following: Select Typical installation to install the common set features, as well as online help. Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install (recommended for those with limited disk space). Select Help to install only the online help. Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation.
Click Next. If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose Install Folder dialog box opens. Continue with step 8 on page 155. If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets dialog box opens (Figure 41).
320985-A
Click Next. The Choose Install Folder dialog box opens (Figure 42).
Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or click Choose to select a different storage path.
Note: If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.
Click Next. The Choose Shortcut Folder dialog box opens (Figure 43).
10 Select the desired shortcut path from the list provided. 11 Click Next.
320985-A
The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box opens (Figure 44). A summary of the choices you have made is displayed for confirmation.
Figure 44 Pre-Installation Summary dialog box
12 Verify the folder, shortcut, and disk space required to install the software. If necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes.
13 Click Install. The installation process begins. When the installation is complete, the Install Complete dialog box opens (Figure 45).
Figure 45 Install Complete dialog box
14 Click Done to exit the installation. JDM is now installed on your machine.
320985-A
This section includes the following topics: Minimum requirements on page 160 Installing JDM on Linux from the CD on page 161 Installing JDM on Solaris from the CD on page 160 Installing JDM on HP-UX from the CD on page 160 Installing JDM on UNIX or Linux from the web on page 161
Minimum requirements
JDM supports two UNIX platforms and one Linux platform: a UNIX SPARC* workstation running the Sun* Solaris* 2.7.x (or higher) an HP* workstation running the HP-UX* 11.x operating system (or higher) a PC running Linux Kernel 2.2 operating system (or higher)
The minimum system requirements for installing JDM on any UNIX or Linux platform are: 4 MB available in a temporary directory 300 MB free in the directory where you want to install the JDM software 128 MB DRAM
320985-A
Run the jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh file. Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux on page 163.
Make the installation file executable. For the Solaris environment, make the file executable by entering:
chmod a+x dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh
Run the installation file. For the Solaris environment, run the dm_xxxx_solaris_sparc.sh file. For the HP-UX environment, run the jdm_xxxx_hpux_pa-risc.sh file. For the Linux environment, run the jdm_xxxx_linux.sh file. Continue with Executing the JDM installation software on UNIX or Linux on page 163.
320985-A
Click Next to continue the installation process. The License Agreement dialog box opens (Figure 47).
320985-A
Click Next. The Choose Install Set dialog box opens (Figure 48).
Do one of the following: Select Typical installation to install the common set features, as well as online help. Select Minimal installation to select minimal features to install (recommended for those with limited disk space). Select Help to install only the online help. Select Custom installation to customize the features prior to installation.
Click Next. If you did not select Custom installation in step 4, then the Choose Install Folder dialog box opens. Continue with step 8 on page 167. If you selected Custom installation in step 4, then the Feature Sets dialog box opens (Figure 49).
6 7
Select which features to install from the feature sets list. Click Next. The Choose Install Folder dialog box opens (Figure 50).
320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 167 Figure 50 Choose Install Folder dialog box
Click Restore Default Folder to use the default location for JDM, or click Choose to select a storage path.
Note: If Device Manager is already installed on your computer, you must choose a storage path that does not conflict with the already existing version.
Click Next. The Pre-Installation Summary dialog box opens (Figure 51).
10 Verify the folder and disk space required to install the software. If necessary, click Previous to return to the appropriate dialog box and make changes.
320985-A
When the installation is complete, the Install Complete dialog box opens (Figure 53).
Figure 53 Install Complete dialog box
12 Click Done to exit the installation. JDM is now installed on your machine.
320985-A
Note: On startup, the Device Manager performs a DNS lookup for the machine on which it is running. If the DNS lookup is slow or fails, the initial Device Manager window may take up to 30 seconds to open.
172 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 54 Device Manager window
320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 173 Figure 55 Properties dialog box
2 3
174 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager Table 28 Properties dialog box fields (continued)
Area SNMP Field Retry Count Description Number of times Device Manager sends the same polling request if a response is not returned to Device Manager. You may want to set this field to three or four. Length of each retry of each polling waiting period. When you access the device through a slow link, you may want to increase the timeout interval and then change the Retransmission Strategy to superlinear. The trace field is used to enable and disable SNMP tracing. When Trace is selected, SNMP protocol data units (PDUs) are displayed in the Device > Log dialog box. When selected (enabled), automatically registers to received traps when Device Manager is launched against a device. This attribute does not apply to Ethernet Switch 325/425. When selected (enabled), Device Manager will listen for traps from the device. The specified number of traps that may exist in the trap log. The default is 500. Specifies the UDP port that Device Manager will listen to receive SNMP traps. When selected (enabled), Device Manager will listen to the syslog. A dialog box displays when checked, before deleting a row. Specifies the default read community. Specifies the default write community.
Timeout
Trace
Listen for Traps Max Traps in Log Trap Port Listen for Syslogs Confirm row deletion Default Read Community Default Write Community
Opening a device
Opening a device displays the device view, a picture of the device. To open the device view, you must enter community strings that determine the access level granted to the device.
320985-A
Table 29 describes the default access community strings for the Device Manager software.
Table 29 SNMP community string default values
Access level Read-only Read/write Description public private
To display the device view: 1 Do one of the following: Choose Device > Open. Choose Device > Open Last, and select an IP address from the list. Click the folder icon in the Device Manager window.
Press Ctrl+O.
2 3
In the Device Name text box, type the DNS name or IP address of the device. In the Read Community and Write Community text boxes, type the appropriate community strings. Note: To gain read/write access to a device in Device Manager, you must enter the read/write community string for both the Read Community and Write Community strings.
Click Open. Device Manager automatically determines what version of software the selected device is running and displays the appropriate Device Manager dialog boxes. The Device Manager window opens, showing a picture of the device (Figure 57) that represents the physical features of the device.
320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 177 Figure 57 Device view
Device view
Status bar
Menu bar
Use the menu bar to set up and operate the Device Manager
Edit
Graph VLAN
Toolbar
The toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to commonly used commands and some additional actions.
320985-A
SSH
Trap Log
Help
Opens online Help in a Web browser. Displays configuration data for the selected chassis object. Opens statistics and graphing dialog boxes for the selected object. Opens the Web Management Software Home Page. Opens the Rmon Alarm Manager.
Graph > Port Graph > Chassis Actions > Open Home Page Rmon > Alarm Manager
Alarm Manager
Device view
The device view allows you to determine at a glance the operating status of the various units and ports in your hardware configuration. You can also use the device view to perform management tasks on specific objects.
Selecting objects
The types of objects contained in the device view are: A standalone switch (called a unit in the menus and dialog boxes) A switch stack (called a chassis in the menus and dialog boxes) A port (including the SFP GBIC port)
Unit or Chassis
object
320985-A
The Port dialog box opens with the Interface tab displayed (Figure 60). The Interface tab describes the GBIC installed in the switch. (The Edit > Unit dialog box describes the MDA installed in the switch.)
182 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 60 Interface tab
320985-A
In addition, the Help menu provides a legend that identifies the port colors and their meanings (Figure 61).
Figure 61 Color port legend
Shortcut menus
Each object in the device view has a shortcut menu that opens when you right-click a selected object. The switch unit shortcut menu (Figure 62) provides access to basic hardware information about the switch and to the graphing dialog boxes for the switch.
Figure 62 Switch unit shortcut menu
Table 35 describes the Switch unit shortcut menu command on the switch unit shortcut menu.
Table 35 Switch unit shortcut menu command
Command Edit Description Opens a dialog box that provides basic hardware information about the switch and allows you to set the Rate Limiting configuration for the switch unit. Indicates that the tooltip function is active. When unchecked, the tooltip function is disabled. A Tooltip is a descriptive text box that appears when the mouse pointer is held over a tool, button or other object. Refreshes the tooltip information.
The port shortcut menu (Figure 63) provides a faster path for editing and graphing a single port; however, you can access the same options using the menu bar or the toolbar.
Figure 63 Port shortcut menu
320985-A
Status bar
The status bar displays error and informational messages from the software application. These messages are not related to the device being managed.
Paste
Causes changed (but not applied) fields to revert to their previous values. Prints the table or graph that is displayed.
Stops the current action (compiling, saving, and so forth). If you are updating or compiling a large data table, the Refresh button changes to a Stop button while this action is taking place. Clicking the Stop button interrupts the polling process. Exports information to a file you specify. You can then import this file into a text editor or spreadsheet for further analysis.
Export Data
Editing objects
You can edit objects and values in the Device Manager device view in the following ways: Select an object on the toolbar, click the Edit Selected button.
The Edit dialog box opens for that object. From a switch or port shortcut menu, choose Edit. The Edit dialog box opens for that object.
When you change the value in a box, the changed value is displayed in bold. However, changes are not applied to the running configuration until you click Apply. Note: Many dialog boxes contain a Refresh button. After you apply changes to fields, click Refresh to display the new information in the dialog box.
320985-A
Types of statistics
The data tables in the statistics dialog boxes list the counters, or categories of statistics being gathered, for the specified object. For example, the categories for ports include Interface, Ethernet Errors, Bridge, and Rmon. Each category can be associated with six types of statistics. Table 38 describes the types of statistics that are available.
Table 38 Types of statistics
Statistic AbsoluteValue Cumulative Description The total count since the last time counters were reset. A system reboot resets all counters. The total count since the statistics window was first opened. The elapsed time for the cumulative counter is displayed at the bottom of the graph window. The cumulative count divided by the cumulative elapsed time. The minimum average for the counter for a given polling interval over the cumulative elapsed time. The maximum average for the counter for a given polling interval over the cumulative elapsed time. The average for the counter over the last polling interval.
Types of graphs
With Device Manager, you can create line, area, bar, and pie graphs. Figure 64, Figure 65, Figure 66, and Figure 67 provide examples of different types of graphs.
188 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 64 Line graph
320985-A
Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager 189 Figure 66 Bar graph
The statistics dialog box for multiple objects shows a single type of statistics (Table 38 on page 187) for the selected objects. For example, Figure 69 shows LastValue statistics for the selected ports.
Figure 69 Interface statistics for multiple ports
320985-A
To change the type of statistics displayed, select a different type from the show list at the bottom of the dialog box. The statistics are updated based on the poll interval shown at the bottom of the dialog box. You can select a different polling interval. Buttons for bar, pie, and line graphs are located at the bottom of a statistics dialog box. See the next section, Viewing statistics as graphs, for instructions to use these buttons. You can export the statistics to a tab-separated file format and import the file into other applications. To export the information, use the Export Data button below the table.
From the shortcut menu for the object, choose Graph. From the main menu, choose Graph > Chassis or Graph > Port.
A statistics dialog box opens with tabs for different categories of statistics for the selected object (Figure 70).
192 Chapter 4 Getting Started with Device Manager Figure 70 Statistics dialog box for a port
3 4 5
Select a tab for the group of statistics you want to view. On the displayed data table, click and drag to select the cells you want to graph. (They must be in the same row or column.) Click one of the graph buttons at the bottom of the dialog box See Types of graphs on page 187. A graph dialog box opens for the selected graph type.
Buttons at the top of the graph dialog boxes for line, area, and bar graphs allow you to change the orientation of the graph, change the scale, or change the graph type.
320985-A
Horizontal
Log Scale
Changes the scale of the x-axis (of an unrotated graph) from numeric to logarithmic. Converts an area graph or bar graph to a line graph.
Line Chart
Area Chart
Bar Chart
Pie Chart
Telnet session
From Device Manager, you can initiate a Telnet session to the console interface for the switch or stack you are currently accessing. To Telnet to a switch:
Note: The SSH connection is established only when the device is SSH capable and enabled. For more information on SSH connections, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
320985-A
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Actions > Open Home Page. On the toolbar, click the Open Home Page button.
Trap log
You can configure an Ethernet Switch 325/425 to send SNMP generic traps. When the Device Manager is running, any traps received are recorded in the trap log. You set the maximum number of entries in the trap log using the Properties dialog box (Figure 55 on page 173). The default number of trap log entries is 500. To view the trap log:
From the Device Manager Main Menu, choose Device > Trap Log. Note: When you operate Device Manager from a UNIX platform, you must be logged in as root in order to receive traps.
Device Manager receives traps on port 162. If this port is being used by another application, you will not be able to view the trap log until the other application is disabled and Device Manager is restarted. By default, traps are sent in SNMP V2c format. However, if you are using an older network management system (NMS), one that supports only SNMP V1 traps (HP OpenView), you can specify the traps to be sent in V1 format. For more information about traps and trap receivers, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
Online Help
Online Help in Device Manager is context-sensitive. You use a Web browser to display online Help. The Web browser should launch automatically when you click the Help button. If the Help topic you are accessing is not displayed in your browser, exit the existing browser session and click the Help button again. If the Web browser does not launch, the default locations of the Help files are the directories listed below.
320985-A
Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, <JDM Installation directory>/help/ Windows 2000, Windows XP hummingbird/v360.zip. After you unzip the file, <JDM Installation directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360/help.html. help.html is the home page for the online help. UNIX <JDM Installation directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360.zip. After you unzip the file, <JDM Installation directory>/help/ hummingbird/v360/help.html. help.html is the home page for the online help.
320985-A
199
Requirements
To use the Web-based management interface, you need the following items: A computer connected to a network port that is a member of the management VLAN One of the following Web browsers installed on the computer: Microsoft* Internet Explorer, version 4.0 or later on Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT*, or Windows XP* Netscape Navigator*, version 4.51 or later on Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, and UNIX* IP address of the Ethernet Switch 325/425 Note: The Web pages of the Web-based management interface may load at different speeds depending on the Web browser you use.
Note: In order to use the Ethernet Switch 325/425 Web-based management functionality, such as downloading software, you must connect your TFTP server to an Ethernet Switch 325/425. For instructions to set the IP address of the switch, refer to IP Configuration/ Setup screen on page 214.
200
Access to the Web management interface must also be enabled for the switch (the default setting) using the Console Interface. For information about enabling Web access, refer to TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen on page 234.
320985-A
201
Network security does not exist the first time you access the Embedded Web Server. The system administrator must create access parameters and passwords to protect the integrity of your network configuration(s). For more information, refer to Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
Menu
The menu (Figure 73) is the same for all pages. It contains a list of seven main headings.
Figure 73 Menu
To navigate the Web-based management interface menu, click a menu title and then click one of its options. When you click an option, the corresponding page opens. The first six headings provide options for viewing and configuring switch parameters. The Support heading provides options to open the online Help file and the Nortel Web site.
System Configuration Guide
202
Table 41 lists the main headings in the Web-based management user interface and their associated options.
Table 41 Main headings and options
Main menu titles Summary Option Stack Information (stack mode only) Switch Information Identify Unit Numbers (stack mode only) Stack Numbering (stack mode only) IP System SNMPv1 SNMPv3 SNMP Trap MAC Address Table Find MAC Address Port Management High Speed Flow Control Software Download ASCII Config Download Configuration File Console/Comm Port RMON Threshold RMON Event Log System Log Port Interface Ethernet Errors Transparent Bridging RMON Ethernet RMON History Port Mirroring Rate Limiting MAC Address Security VLAN Spanning Tree Multilink Trunk LACP QoS
Configuration
Fault
Statistics
Application
320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface Table 41 Main headings and options (continued)
Main menu titles Administration Option System Information Quick Start Security Logout Reset Reset to Defaults Help Release Notes Manuals Upgrade
203
Support
Tools are provided in the menu to assist you in navigating the Web-based management interface. Caution: Web browser capabilities such as page bookmarking, refresh, and page forward and page back, function as they would in any other Web site. However, these capabilities do not enhance the functionality of the Web-based management interface. Nortel recommends that you use only the navigation tools provided in the management interface. Table 42 describes the icons that appear on the menu.
Table 42 Menu icons
Button or icon Description This icon identifies a menu title. Click on this icon to display its options. This icon identifies a menu title option. Click on this icon to display the corresponding page. This icon identifies a menu title option with a hyperlink to related pages. This icon is linked to an action, for example, logout, reset, or reset to system defaults. Clicking on the Nortel logo opens the corporate home page in a new Web browser.
204
Management page
When you click a menu option, the corresponding management page opens. Figure 74 shows the page displayed for the Administration > Security > Console option.
Figure 74 Console page
Note: The Console Stack Password Setting section is active only when the switch is in the stack mode. A page is composed of one or more of the following elements: Tables and input forms The gray cells in a page are display only, and white cells are input fields. Check boxes You enable or disable a selection by clicking a check box. When a check mark is displayed in the box, that selection is enabled. You disable a selection by clicking the checked box.
320985-A
205
Icons and buttons Icons and buttons perform an action concerning the displayed page or the switch. Some pages include a button that opens another page or updates the values shown on the current page. Some pages include icons that initiate an action, such as reformatting the current displayed data as a bar or pie chart.
Table 43 describes the icons that you use to modify information in a statistical table.
Table 43 Page icons
Icon Name Modify View Delete Help Description Accesses a modification page for the selected row. Accesses a view only statistics page for the selected row. Deletes a row. Accesses the Help menu in a new Web browser.
Note: Text within a table that is underlined and highlighted in blue and is a hyperlink to a related management page.
206
320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface Table 44 Switch Information page fields
Item Manufacturing Data Code Hardware Version Serial Number Operational State Description The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format. The hardware version of the policy switch. The serial number of the policy switch.
207
The current operational state of the device. The operational states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured. The mac address of the switch. The IP address of the switch. The power status of the switch. The fan status of the switch.
208
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface Figure 76 Stack Information page
Table 45 describes the fields on the Stack Information and Stack Inventory sections of the Stack Information page.
Table 45 Stack Information page fields
Section Stack Information Field System Description Software Version MAC Address IP Address Manufacturing Date Code Serial Number Operational State Description The name created in the configuration process to identify the stack. The version of the running software. The MAC address of the stack. The IP address of the stack. The date of manufacture of the board in ASCII format: YYYYMMDD. The serial number of the base unit. The current operational state of the device. The operational states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured
320985-A
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface Table 45 Stack Information page fields (continued)
Section Stack Inventory Field Unit Description The unit number assigned to the device by the network manager. For more information on stack numbering, see page 209. The description of the device or its subcomponent.
209
The current operational state of the stack. The operational states are: Other, Not Available, Removed, Disabled, Normal, Reset in Progress, Testing, Warning, Non Fatal Errors, Fatal Error, and Not Configured.
In the lower-left corner of the Stack Information page, click the number of the device you want to view. The Stack Information page is updated with information about the selected switch.
From the main menu, choose Summary > Stack Numbering. The Stack Numbering page opens (Figure 77).
210
Chapter 5 Using the Web-based management interface Figure 77 Stack Numbering Setting page
XX.XX.XX.XX.XX.XX MAC address of the corresponding unit listed in the Current Unit Number field. 1..8 Choose a new number from the list to assign to your selected policy switch.
Do one of the following: Click OK to renumber the stack. Click Cancel to return to the Stack Numbering page without making changes.
320985-A
211
To continue viewing summary information or to start the configuration process, choose another option from the main menu.
212
320985-A
213
214
IP Configuration/Setup screen
The IP Configuration/Setup screen (Figure 79) allows you to set or modify the Ethernet Switch 325/425 IP configuration parameters. Data that you enter in the user-configurable fields takes effect as soon as you press Enter. To open the IP Configuration/Setup screen:
Configurable In Use Last BootP ------------------- --------------- ------------In-Band Stack IP Address: [ 0.0.0.0 ] 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 In-Band Switch IP Address: [ 134.177.224.102 ] 134.177.224.102 0.0.0.0 In-Band Subnet Mask: [ 255.255.255.0 ] 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 Default Gateway: IP Address to Ping: Start Ping: [ 134.177.224.1 ] [ 10.30.40.1 ] [ No ] 134.177.224.1 0.0.0.0
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Table 47 describes the IP Configuration/Setup screen fields. Note: The read-only fields in this screen are updated based on the BootP mode specified in the BootP Request Mode field. (See Choosing a BootP request mode on page 216 for more information.)
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Table 47 IP Configuration/Setup screen fields
Field BootP Request Mode Description
215
One of four modes of operation for BootP. (See Choosing a BootP request mode on page 216 for details about the four modes.) Default Value Range BootP When Needed BootP Disabled, BootP When Needed, BootP Always, BootP or Last Address
Column header for the user-configurable IP configuration fields in this screen. Column header for the read-only fields in this screen. The read-only data displayed in this column represents IP configuration that is currently in use. Column header for the read-only fields in this screen. The read-only data displayed in this column represents IP configuration obtained from the last BootP reply received.
In-Band Stack IP The in-band stack IP address field. This field is not required for the operation of the Address standalone switch. Default Value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal point
The in-band IP address of the switch. This field is not required for the operation of the stack. This field can not use the same IP address used for the stack. Default Value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal point
Note: When the IP address is entered in the In-Band IP Address field, and the In-Band Subnet Mask field value is not present, the software provides an in-use default value for the In-Band Subnet Mask field that is based on the class of the IP address entered in the In-Band IP Address field.
216
Default Gateway
The IP address of the default gateway. Default Value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal point
IP Address to Ping
The IP address of the network device you want to ping. This field is not required for the operation of the stack. Default Value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, between 0 and 255, separated by a decimal point
Start Ping
Pings the selected network device when you choose Yes. Default Value Range No No, Yes
320985-A
217
BootP or Last Address Note: Whenever the switch is broadcasting BootP requests, the BootP process eventually times out if a reply is not received. When the process times out, the BootP request mode automatically changes to BootP Disabled mode. To restart the BootP process, change the BootP request mode to any of the three following modes: BootP When Needed BootP Always BootP or Last Address.
If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.
BootP Always
This option allows you to manage the switch that has been configured with the IP address obtained from the BootP server. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP Always mode as described in the steps below: The switch continues to broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether an in-band IP address is set from the console terminal. If the switch receives a BootP reply that contains an in-band IP address, the switch uses this new in-band IP address.
System Configuration Guide
218
If the switch does not receive a BootP reply, the switch cannot be managed using the in-band IP address set from the console terminal.
If an IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.
BootP Disabled
This option allows you to manage the switch by using the IP address set from the console terminal. The Ethernet Switch 325/425 operates in the BootP Disabled mode as described in the steps below: The switch does not broadcast BootP requests, regardless of whether an IP address is set from the console terminal. The switch can be managed only by using the in-band switch IP address set from the console terminal.
If the IP address specified as the in-band IP address is not currently in use, these actions take effect immediately. If an IP address is currently in use, these actions take effect only after the switch is reset or power cycled.
320985-A
219
Read-Only Community String: Read-Write Community String: Trap #1 IP Address: Community String: Trap #2 IP Address: Community String: Trap #3 IP Address: Community String: Trap #4 IP Address: Community String: Authentication Trap: AutoTopology:
[ Enabled [ Enabled
] ]
Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
220
The community string used for in-band read-write SNMP operations. Default value Range private Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters
Trap #1 IP Address1
Number one of four trap IP addresses. Successive Trap IP address fields are numbered 2, 3, and 4. Each trap address has an associated community string (see Community String). Default value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
Community String
The community string associated with one of the four trap IP addresses (see Trap #1 IP Address). Default value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 32 printable characters
Authentication Trap
Determines whether a trap is sent when there is an SNMP authentication failure. Default value Range Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Autotopology
Allows you to enable or disable the switch participation in autotopology, which allows network topology mapping of other switches in your network. Default value Range Enabled Disabled
1 The Trap IP Address and Community String fields can be set using a MIB table (in a Nortel proprietary MIB). The status of the row in the MIB table can be set to Ignore. If the row status is set to Ignore, the fields appear to be set when viewed from the console terminal; however, no traps are sent to that address until the row status is set to Valid.
320985-A
221
Operation Mode:
Switch
MAC Address: Reset Count: Last Reset Type: Power Status: Local GBIC Type: sysDescr: sysObjectID: sysUpTime: sysServices: sysContact: sysName: sysLocation:
00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80 9 Management Reset Primary Power port 49, None port 50, None Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1 7 days, 17:49:05 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized. 3 [ ] [ Ethernet 428-48T ] [ ]
Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
222
Size of Stack
Base Unit
A read-only field that indicates the last type of reset. Default Value Range Power Cycle Power Cycle, Software Download, Management Reset, Management Factory Reset
Power Status
A read-only field that indicates the current power source (primary, RPSU, or both). Default Value Range Primary Power Primary Power, Redundant Power, Primary and Redundant Power
A read-only field that indicates the GBIC type that is configured in this unit. (This field is applicable only to the Ethernet Switch 425). A read-only field that specifies hardware and software versions. A read-only field that provides a unique identification of the switch, which contains the vendors private enterprise number. A read-only field that shows the length of time since the last reset. Note that this field is updated when the screen is redisplayed.
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Table 49 System Characteristics screen fields (continued)
Field sysServices sysContact Description
223
A read-only field that indicates the switchs physical and data link layer functionality. The name and phone number of the person responsible for the switch. Default Value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysName
A name that uniquely identifies the switch. Default Value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters1
sysLocation
The physical location of the switch. Default Value Range Zero-length string Any ASCII string of up to 56 printable characters
1 Although this field can be set to up to 255 characters from a Network Management Station (NMS), only 56 characters are displayed on the console terminal.
224
] ] ] ] ]
Primary RADIUS Server: Secondary RADIUS Server: UDP RADIUS Port: RADIUS Shared Secret:
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Note: Release 3.6 software supports a security enhancement that provides usernames in addition to passwords for switch access. If you set a password in the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen, the next time you log in to the switch, you are prompted to enter a valid username (see Figure 83 on page 231). Therefore, ensure you are aware of the valid usernames (default RW and RO) before you change passwords. For information about modifying existing usernames, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
320985-A
225
Caution: If you choose a baud rate that does not match your console terminal baud rate, you can lose communication with the configuration interface when you press Enter. If communication is lost, set your console terminal to match the new service port setting. Achtung: Bei Auswahl einer Baud rate, die nicht mit der Baudrate des Konsolenterminals bereinstimmt, geht die Kommunikation mit der Konsolenschnittstelle verloren, wenn Sie die Eingabetaste drcken. Stellen Sie in diesem Fall das Konsolenterminal so ein, da es mit der neuen Einstellung der Service-Schnittstelle bereinstimmt. Attention: Si vous slectionnez un dbit diffrent de celui de votre terminal, vous perdrez le contact avec l'interface de votre console ds que vous appuierez sur [Entre]. Pour restaurer la communication, alignez le dbit de votre terminal sur le nouveau dbit de votre port de service. Precaucin: Si selecciona una velocidad de transmisin que no coincide con la velocidad de transmisin del terminal de la consola, perder la comunicacin con el interfaz de la consola al pulsar [Intro]. Si se pierde la comunicacin, ajuste el terminal de la consola para que coincida con el nuevo valor del puerto de servicio. Attenzione: Nel caso in cui si scelga una velocit di trasmissione non corrispondente a quella del terminale della console, la comunicazione con l'interfaccia della console cadr premendo il tasto [Invio]. Se la comunicazione cade, impostare il terminale della console in modo tale che corrisponda alla nuova impostazione della porta di servizio.
System Configuration Guide
226
Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of a standalone switch through a console terminal. If you set this field to Local Password, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt. See Console Read-Only Switch Password and Console Read-Write Switch Password for more information. Default Value Range None None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of any participating switch in a stack configuration through a console terminal. If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI of any stack unit. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt when accessing the stack. See Console Read-Only Stack Password and Console Read-Write Stack Password for more information. Default Value Range None None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of a standalone switch through a Telnet/WEB session. If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt. See Console Read-Only Switch Password and Console Read-Write Switch Password descriptions for more information. Default Value Range None None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
Enables password protection for accessing the console interface (CI) of any participating switch in a stack configuration, through a Telnet/WEB session. If you set this field to Required, you can use the Logout option to restrict access to the CI of any stack unit. Thereafter, you must specify the correct password at the console-terminal prompt when accessing the stack. See Console Read-Only Stack Password and Console Read-Write Stack Password for more information. Default Value Range None None, Local Password, RADIUS Authentication
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)
Field Console Read-Only Switch Password Description
227
When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-only password access to the CI of a standalone switch. Users can access the CI using the correct password (see default), but cannot change parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to Default option. Default Value Range user An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters
When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-write password access to the CI of a standalone switch. Users can log in to the CI using the correct password (see default) and can change any parameter, except the stack passwords. You can change the default passwords for read-only access and read-write access to a private password. Default Value: Range: secure Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters Caution: If you change the system-supplied default passwords, be sure to write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place. If you forget the new passwords, you cannot access the console interface. In that case, contact Nortel for help. Achtung: Wenn Sie die fr das System standardmig eingestellten Pawrter ndern, notieren Sie sich die neuen Pawrter, und bewahren Sie sie an einem sicheren Ort auf. Falls Sie die neuen Pawrter vergessen, knnen Sie nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen. Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an Nortel, um Untersttzung zu erhalten. Attention: Si vous changez les mots de passe par dfaut du systme, assurez-vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans un endroit sr. Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe, vous ne pourrez plus accder votre interface. Le cas chant, veuillez contacter Nortel. Precaucin: Si modifica las contraseas predeterminadas asignadas por el sistema, asegrese de anotar las nuevas contraseas y gurdelas en un lugar seguro. Si olvida las nuevas contraseas, no podr acceder al interfaz de la consola. En ese caso, pngase en contacto con Nortel para obtener ayuda al respecto. Attenzione: In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema, assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro. Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate, non sar possibile accedere all'interfaccia della console. In tal caso, contattare la Nortel per avere assistenza.
228
When the Console Switch Password field is set to Required (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-only password access to the CI of any participating switch in a stack configuration. Users can access the CI using the correct password (see default), but cannot change any parameters or use the Reset option or Reset to Default option. Default Value Range user An ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Table 50 Console/Comm Port Configuration screen fields (continued)
Field Console Read-Write Stack Password Description
229
When the Console Switch Password field is set to Local Password (for Telnet, for Console, or for Both), this field allows read-write password access to the CI of any participating switch in a stack configuration. Users can log in to the CI using the correct password (see default), and can change any parameter, except the switch password. You can change the default passwords for read-only access and read-write access to a private password. Default Value: Range: secure Any ASCII string of up to 15 printable characters Caution: When you change the system-supplied default passwords, be sure to write the new passwords down and keep them in a safe place. If you forget the new passwords, you cannot access the console interface. In that case, contact Nortel for help. Achtung: Wenn Sie die fr das System standardmig eingestellten Pawrter ndern, notieren Sie sich die neuen Pawrter, und bewahren Sie sie an einem sicheren Ort auf. Falls Sie die neuen Pawrter vergessen, knnen Sie nicht mehr auf die Konsolenschnittstelle zugreifen. Wenden Sie sich in diesem Fall an Nortel, um Untersttzung zu erhalten. Attention: Si vous changez les mots de passe par dfaut du systme, assurez-vous de bien noter vos nouveaux mots de passe et de les conserver dans un endroit sr. Si vous perdez vos nouveaux mots de passe, vous ne pourrez plus accder votre interface. Le cas chant, veuillez contacter Nortel. Precaucin: Si modifica las contraseas predeterminadas asignadas por el sistema, asegrese de anotar las nuevas contraseas y gurdelas en un lugar seguro. Si olvida las nuevas contraseas, no podr acceder al interfaz de la consola. En ese caso, pngase en contacto con Nortel para obtener ayuda al respecto. Attenzione: In caso di modifica delle password predefinite nel sistema, assicurarsi di annotare le nuove password e di conservarle in un luogo sicuro. Nel caso in cui le nuove password vengano dimenticate, non sar possibile accedere all'interfaccia della console. In tal caso, contattare la Nortel per avere assistenza.
230
Primary RADIUS Server The IP address of the Primary RADIUS server. Default Range Secondary RADIUS Server 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
The IP address of the Secondary RADIUS server. Default Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
The user datagram protocol (UDP) port for the RADIUS server. Default Range 1645 0 to 65536
Your special switch security code that provides authentication to the RADIUS server. Default Range Null string (which is not authenticated) Any contiguous ASCII string that contains at least 1 printable character, up to a maximum of 35
320985-A
231
Logging in
If you set a password in the Console/Comm Port Configuration screen (Figure 82 on page 224), the next time you access the switch, you are prompted for a username and password as shown in Figure 83 (default usernames are RW and RO).
Figure 83 Login screen
Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:0C FW 3.5.0.2 SW 3.6.0
Username: Password:
[ RW ] [ *************** ]
Enter a valid username and password and press Enter. You are then directed to the Console Interface main menu. For information about modifying the existing usernames, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A).
232
Choose Renumber Stack Units (or press n) from the main menu.
Figure 84 Renumber Stack Units screen.
Renumber Stack Units Current Unit Number ------------------[ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ] MAC Address ---------------------------00-60-fd-77-a6-0c 00-60-fd-77-a5-f0 00-60-fd-77-a4-4c 00-60-fd-77-ab-84 New Unit Number --------------[ 1 ] [ 2 ] [ 3 ] [ 4 ]
Renumbering stack units will cause an automatic Reset to Current Settings to occur across the entire stack. The current configuration will be adapted to the new numbering scheme. Check the stack configuration after the reset to confirm the desired configuration is set. Are you sure you want to renumber switches with the new settings? [ No ]
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
320985-A
233
Specifies whether to start the renumbering process (default is No). Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes. Renumbering resets the switch with the current configuration values. When you select this option, the switch resets, runs a self-test, then displays the Nortel logo screen. After you press Ctrl+Y at the screen prompt, the console screen temporarily displays the (standalone) Ethernet Switch 325/425 main menu. Then, within 20 seconds, the console screen refreshes and displays the main menu screen for the stack configuration. The Unit LEDs display the new numbering order. Default Value Range No No, Yes
Choose Display Hardware Units (or press h) from the main menu.
234
GBIC1 Model
GBIC2 Model
SW Version
Press Ctrl-N to display next screen. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu.
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Figure 86 TELNET Configuration screen
TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration TELNET: Login Timeout :[ Login Retries :[ Inactivity Timeout:[ Event Logging :[ # -1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 | | | | | Access: TELNET: [ Enabled SNMP : [ Enabled WEB : [ Enabled Use List: [ Yes ] [ Yes ] [ Yes ]
235
] ] ]
Allowed Source IP Address ------------------------[ 0.0.0.0 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
Allowed Source Mask ------------------------[ 0.0.0.0 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ] [ 255.255.255.255 ]
Enter number, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
TELNET Access Allows a user remote access to the CI through a Telnet session. Default value Range SNMP Access Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Specifies if SNMP access is allowed and only to those on the list. (SNMP access includes the DM system.) Default value Range Access: Enabled; Use List: Yes Access: Enabled, Disabled; Use List: Yes, No
236
Specifies the amount of time a user has to enter the correct password at the console-terminal prompt. Default value Range 1 minute 0 to 10 minutes (0 indicates no timeout)
Login Retries
Specifies the number of times a user can enter an incorrect password at the console-terminal prompt before terminating the session. Default value Range 3 1 to 100
Inactivity Timeout
Specifies the amount of time the session can be inactive before it is terminated. Default value Range 15 minutes 0 to 60 minutes (0 indicates no timeout)
Event Logging
Specifies the types of events that are displayed in the Event Log screen (see System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A). Default value Range Description All All, None, Accesses, Failures All: Logs the following Telnet events to the Event Log screen: TELNET connect: Indicates the IP address and access mode of a Telnet session. TELNET disconnect: Indicates the IP address of the remote host and the access mode, due to either a logout or inactivity. Failed TELNET connection attempts: Indicates the IP address of the remote host whose IP address is not on the list of allowed addresses, or indicates the IP address of the remote host that did not supply the correct password.
None: Indicates that no Telnet events are logged in the Event Log screen. Accesses: Logs only Telnet connect and disconnect events in the Event Log screen. Failures: Logs only failed Telnet connection attempts in the Event Log screen.
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Table 52 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen fields (continued)
Field Description
237
Allowed Source Specifies up to 10 user-assigned host IP addresses that are allowed Telnet access to the IP Address CI. Default value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
Allowed Source Specifies up to 10 user-assigned allowed source address masks. The remote IP address Mask is masked with the Allowed Source Mask and, if the resulting value equals the Allowed Source IP address, the connection is allowed. For example, a connection would be allowed with the following settings: Remote IP address = 192.0.1.5 Allowed Source IP Address = 192.0.1.0 Allowed Source Mask = 255.255.255.0 Default value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP mask assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
Achtung: Unterbrechen Sie die Stromzufuhr zum Gert nicht, whrend die Software heruntergeladen wird. Bei Unterbrechung der Stromzufuhr kann das Firmware-Image beschdigt werden.
Attention: Ne pas couper l'alimentation de l'appareil pendant le chargement du logiciel. En cas d'interruption, le programme rsident peut tre endommag.
238
Precaucin: No interrumpa la alimentacin del dispositivo durante el proceso de descarga del software. Si lo hace, puede alterar la imagen de la programacin (firmware).
Attenzione: Non interrompere l'alimentazione elettrica al dispositivo durante il processo di scaricamento del software. In caso di interruzione, l'immagine firmware potrebbe danneggiarsi.
To download the software image, you need a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server in your network, and an IP address for the switch (or stack, if configured). To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to IP Configuration/Setup screen on page 214. To open the Software Download screen:
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Figure 87 Software Download screen for an Ethernet Switch 325/425 stack
Software Download
239
Software Image Filename: Diagnostics Image Filename: TFTP Server IP Address: Start TFTP Load of New Image:
[ docu/hummingbird_360.img ] [ ] [ 198.202.188.174 ] [ No ]
Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Image Filename The Ethernet Switch 325/425 software image load file name. Note: Certain software releases may require you to download two images: the boot code image and the agent image. For proper operation of the switch, the new boot code image must be downloaded before the agent image is downloaded. Default value Range Diagnostics Filename Zero-length string An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
The Ethernet Switch 325/425 diagnostics file name. Default value Range Zero-length string An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
The IP address of your TFTP load host. Default value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
240
Start TFTP Load Specifies whether to start the download of the switch software image (default is No). of New Image Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes. Press Enter to initiate the software download process. Note: The software download process can take up to 60 seconds to complete (or more if the load host path is congested or there is a high volume of network traffic). To ensure that the download process is not interrupted, do not power down the switch for approximately 10 minutes. Default value Range No No, Software Image, Diagnostics, Software Image If Newer, Download image without reset, Download diag without reset.
320985-A
241
The Configuration File Download/Upload screen (Figure 89) allows you to store and retrieve your switch/stack configuration parameters on a TFTP server. It also allows you to enable and disable the autosave feature.
Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
242
Configuration Image Filename: TFTP Server IP Address: Copy Configuration Image to Server: Retrieve Configuration Image from Server:
[ ] [ 198.202.188.174 ] [ No ] [ No ]
Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
The IP address of your TFTP load host. Default value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Table 54 Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields (continued)
Field Copy Configuration Image to Server Description
243
Specifies whether to copy the presently configured switch/stack parameters to the specified TFTP server (default is No). Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes. Press Enter to initiate the process. Default Value Range No Yes, No
Specifies whether to retrieve the stored switch/stack configuration parameters from the specified TFTP server (default is No). If you choose Yes, the download process begins immediately and, when completed, causes the switch/stack to reset with the new configuration parameters. Use the spacebar to toggle the selection to Yes. Press Enter to initiate the process. Default Value Range No Yes, No
Requirements
The following requirements apply to the Configuration File feature: The Configuration File feature can only be used to copy standalone switch configuration parameters to other standalone switches or to copy stack configuration parameters to other stack configurations. For example, you cannot duplicate the configuration parameters of a unit in a stack configuration and use it to configure a standalone switch. A configuration file obtained from a standalone switch can only be used to configure other standalone switches that have the same firmware revision and model type as the donor standalone switch. A configuration file obtained from a stack unit can only be used to configure other stacks that have the same number of switches, firmware version, model types, and physical IDs as the stack the donor stack unit resides in. Reconfigured stacks are configured according to the unit order number of the donor unit. For example, the configuration file parameters from a donor unit with physical ID x are used to reconfigure the unit with physical ID x.
244
320985-A
Chapter 6 System configuration using the Console Interface Figure 90 ASCII Configuration File Download screen
ASCII Configuration File Download
245
ASCII Configuration Filename: TFTP Server IP Address: Retrieve Configuration File from Server: Last Manual Configuration Status: Last Auto Configuration Status: Auto Configuration on Reset:
Enter text, press <Return> or <Enter> when complete. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
Table 56 describes the fields available on the ASCII Configuration File Download screen.
Table 56 ASCII Configuration File Download/Upload screen fields
Field ASCII Configuration Filename Description Enter the file name of the ASCII configuration file you want to download to the switch. Specify a file name that allows you to identify the file for retrieval. The ASCII configuration file must already exist on the TFTP server. It must also be read/write enabled. Default value Range TFTP Server IP Address Zero-length string An ASCII string of up to 30 printable characters
Specify the IP address of your TFTP server. Default value Range 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Four-octet dotted-decimal notation, where each octet is represented as a decimal value, separated by a decimal point.
246
The system displays the status of the last manual configuration. Default value Range Passed Passed, Failed
The system displays the status of the last automatic configuration. Default value Range Passed Passed, Failed
This field allows you to select the option of automatically configuring the switch or stack every time the switch or the stack is reset. The values that can be assigned to this field are: Disabled Auto configuration on reset is disabled. Use Configured Use manually configured ASCII configuration file name and TFTP server address for auto configuration on reset. Use BootP Retrieve ASCII configuration file name, and optionally server address, using BootP, when BootP is enabled, and perform auto configuration on reset using these parameters. Note: Refer to Appendix D, Sample BootP configuration file, on page 443 for a sample BootP configuration file. Default value Range Disabled Disabled, Use Configured, Use BootP
320985-A
247
Autosave
Enabled
Use space bar to display choices, press <Return> or <Enter> to select choice. Press Ctrl-R to return to previous menu. Press Ctrl-C to return to Main Menu.
248
Using SNTP
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) feature synchronizes the Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) to an accuracy within 1 second. This feature adheres to the IEEE RFC 2030 (MIB is the s5agent). With this feature, the system can obtain the time from any RFC 2030-compliant NTP/SNTP server. Note: If you have trouble using this feature, try other NTP servers. Some NTP servers may be overloaded or currently inoperable. The system attempts to connect to the NTP server at least three times, with five minutes duration between each retry. If the connection fails after three attempts, the system waits for the next synchronization time (the default is 24 hours) and begins the process again. SNTP provides a real-time timestamp for the software, shown as Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). If SNTP is enabled (the default value is disabled), the system synchronizes with the configured NTP server at boot-up and at user-configurable periods thereafter (the default sync interval is 24 hours). The first synchronization is not performed until network connectivity is established. SNTP supports primary and secondary NTP servers. The system tries the secondary NTP server only if the primary NTP server is unresponsive.
320985-A
249
250
For more information on these commands, see System configuration using the CLI on page 251.
320985-A
251
ip address command
The ip address command sets the IP address and subnet mask for the switch or a stack. The syntax for the ip address command is:
ip address [stack|switch|unit] <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [netmask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]
The ip address command is in the config command mode. If you do not enter either the stack or switch parameter, the system automatically modifies the stack IP address when in stack mode and modifies the switch IP address when in standalone mode.
320985-A
Table 58 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address command.
Table 58 ip address command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables stack|switch unit Description Sets the stack the IP address and subnet mask or the switch IP address and netmask. Sets the IP address of another unit in a stack.
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation; netmask is optional. netmask Set the IP subnet mask for the stack or switch.
Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.
no ip address command
The no ip address command clears the IP address and subnet mask. This command sets the IP address and subnet mask for a switch or a stack to all zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip address command is:
no ip address {stack|switch}
The no ip address command is in the config command mode. Table 59 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip address command.
Table 59 no ip address command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables stack|switch unit Description Zeroes out the stack IP address and subnet mask for the switch IP address and subnet mask. Sets the IP address of another unit in a stack.
Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web. You also disable any new Telnet connection, and you must connect to the serial console port to configure a new IP address.
ip default-gateway command
The ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address for a switch or a stack. The syntax for the ip default-gateway command is:
ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>
The ip default-gateway command is in the config command mode. Table 60 describes the parameters and variables for the ip default-gateway command.
Table 60 ip default-gateway command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables Description
Note: When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.
no ip default-gateway command
The no ip default-gateway command sets the IP default gateway address to zeros (0). The syntax for the no ip default-gateway command is:
no ip default-gateway
320985-A
The no ip default-gateway command has no parameters or variables. Note: When you change the IP gateway address, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web. You also may disable any new Telnet connection required to connect to the serial console port to configure a new IP Gateway address.
show ip command
The show ip command displays the IP configurations, specifically BootP mode, stack address, switch address, subnet mask, and gateway address. This command displays the these parameters for what is configured, what is in use, and the last BootP. The syntax for the show ip command is:
show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address [stack|switch]] [dns]
The show ip command is in the exec command mode. If you do not enter any parameters, this command displays all the IP-related configuration information. Table 61 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip command.
Table 61 show ip command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables bootp default-gateway address stack|switch dns Description Displays BootP-related IP information. Displays the IP address of the default gateway. Displays the current IP address. Specifies current IP address of the stack or the switch. Displays DNS configuration.
256 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Figure 92 show ip command output
425-48T(config-if)#show ip BootP Mode: BootP Disabled Configured --------------Stack IP Address: 0.0.0.0 Switch IP Address: 192.168.151.175 Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0 Default Gateway: 192.168.151.1 425-48T(config-if)# In Use Last BootP --------------- --------------0.0.0.0 192.168.151.175 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 0.0.0.0 192.168.151.1 0.0.0.0
The show ip address command is in the exec command mode. Table 62 describes the parameters and variables for the show ip address command.
Table 62 show ip address command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables address stack|switch unit Description Displays the current IP address. Specifies current IP address of the stack or the switch. Displays the IP address of another unit in a stack.
320985-A
The ip address unit command is in the config command mode. Table 63 describes the parameters and variables for the ip address unit command.
Table 63 ip address unit command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables unit <1-8> A.B.C.D Description Sets the unit you are assigning an IP address. Enter IP address in dotted decimal notation.
Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.
The no ip address unit command is in the config command mode. Table 64 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip address unit command.
Table 64 no ip address unit command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables unit <1-8> Description Zeroes out the IP address for the specified unit.
Note: When you change the IP address or subnet mask, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.You also disable any new Telnet connection, and you must connect to the serial console port to configure a new IP address.
320985-A
Table 65 describes the parameters and variables for the default ip address unit command.
Table 65 default ip address unit command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables unit <1-8> Description Zeroes out the IP address for the specified unit.
Note: When you change the IP gateway, you may lose connection to Telnet and the Web.
Pinging
To ensure that the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 has connectivity to the network, ping a device you know is connected to this network.
ping command
The ping command tests the network connection to another network device. The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet from the switch to the target device. The local IP address must be set before issuing the ping command. Refer to Assigning and clearing IP addresses on page 252 for information on setting IP addresses. The syntax for the ping command is:
ping <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [datasize <64-4096>] [{count <1-9999>} | continuous] [{timeout | -t} <1-120>] [interval <1-60>] [debug]
Table 66 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command.
Table 66 ping command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Description Specify the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal notation. Specifies the size of the ICMP packet to be sent. The data size range is from 64 to 4096 bytes. Sets the number of ICMP packets to be sent. The continuous mode sets the ping running until the user interrupts it by entering Ctrl-C. Set the timeout using either the timeout or -t parameter followed by the number of seconds the switch must wait before timing out. Specifies the number of seconds between transmitted packets. Provides additional output information such as ICMP sequence number and trip time.
datasize <64-4096> {count <1-9999>} | continuous {timeout | -t} <1-120> interval <1-60> debug
If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch receives the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the address is not responding. Figure 94 shows sample ping responses.
Figure 94 ping command responses
425-48T>ping 192.168.151.174 Reply from 192.168.151.174: 64 bytes time=16 ms Host is reachable 425-48T>
320985-A
where the [ -y ] parameter instructs the switch not to prompt for confirmation. If the [ -y ] parameter is not included in the command, the following message appears:
Warning the switch/stack will be reset to factory default configuration Do you wish to continue (y/n) ?
Enter y to restore the switch to default. The restore factory-default command is in the privExec command mode.
ip domain-name command on page 265 no ip domain-name command on page 265 default ip domain-name command on page 265
The show ip dns command is in the exec command mode. The show ip dns command has no parameters or variables. Figure 95 displays sample output from the show ip dns command.
Figure 95 show ip dns command output
425-48T(config)#show ip dns DNS Default Domain name: None DNS Servers ----------0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 425-48T(config)#
ping command
The ping command tests the network connection to another network device. The command sends an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet from the switch to the target device. The local IP address must be set before issuing the ping command. You can ping a host using either its IP address or hostname.
320985-A
The ping command is in the exec command mode. Table 67 describes the parameters and variables for the ping command.
Table 67 ping command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <A.B.C.D or Hostname> Description Specify: the IP address of the target device in dotted-decimal notation the hostname of the device to ping (The hostname can be a simple name, such as fred; in this case the DNS domain name, if set, is appended. Or the hostname can be a full hostname, such as fred.ca.nortel.com.)
If the device receives the packet, it sends a ping reply. When the switch receives the reply, it displays a message indicating that the specified IP address is being used. If no reply is received, a message indicates that the address is not responding. Figure 96 displays sample ping responses.
Figure 96 ping command responses
425-48T#ping 10.10.40.29 Host is reachable 425-48T#
ip name-server command
The ip name-server command adds one or more DNS servers IP addresses. The syntax for the ip name-server command is:
ip name-server <A.B.C.D>
The ip name-server command is in the config command mode. Note: You can add up to 3 servers; adding one at a time.
Table 68 describes the parameters and variables for the ip name-server command.
Table 68 ip name-server command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <A.B.C.D> Description Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
no ip name-server command
The no ip name-server command removes one or more DNS servers IP addresses. The syntax for the no ip name-server command is:
no ip name-server <A.B.C.D>
The no ip name-server command is in the config command mode. Table 69 describes the parameters and variables for the no ip name-server command.
Table 69 no ip name-server command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <A.B.C.D> Description Enter the IP address of a DNS server.
320985-A
ip domain-name command
The ip domain-name command sets the systems DNS domain name. The syntax for the ip domain-name command is:
ip domain-name [<LINE>]
The ip domain-name command is in the config command mode. Table 70 describes the parameters and variables for the ip domain-name command.
Table 70 ip domain-name command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <LINE> Description Enter a DNS domain name.
no ip domain-name command
The no ip domain-name command clears the systems DNS domain name (sets it to an empty string). The syntax for the no ip domain-name command is:
no ip domain-name
The no ip domain-name command is in the config command mode. The no ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.
The default ip domain-name command is in the config command mode. The default ip domain-name command has no parameters or variables.
Configuration Management
This section covers the following topics: Automatically loading Configuration file on page 266 ASCII Configuration Generator on page 268
The configure network command is in the exec mode. Note: When you enter configure network with no parameters, the system prompts you for the script file name and TFTP server address and then downloads the script.
320985-A
Table 71 describes the parameters and variables for the configure network command.
Table 71 configure network command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables load-on-boot {disable|use-bootp|use-config Description Specifies the settings for automatically loading a configuration file when the system boots: disabledisables the automatic loading of config file use-bootspecifies using the BootP file as the automatically loaded config file use-configspecifies using the ASCII configuration file as the automatically loaded config file Note: If you omit this parameter, the system immediately downloads and runs the ASCII config file. filename <WORD> Specifies the file name. Note: If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system uses the configured file name. address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> Specifies the TFTP server from which to load the file. Enter the IP address in dotted-decimal notation. Note: If you omit this parameter and do not specify BootP, the system uses the configured address.
Note: When you specify the file name or address, these parameters will be changed at the next reboot, even if you do not specify load-on-boot.
The show config-network command has no parameters or values. Figure 97 shows the output for the show config-network command.
Figure 97 show config-network command
425-48T(config-if)#show config-network Auto-Load Configuration On Boot: Disabled Configuration Filename: TFTP Server IP Address: 198.202.188.174 Last Auto Configuration Status: Passed Last Manual Configuration Status: Passed
show running-config command on page 269 copy running-config tftp command on page 270
This command can be executed in the config mode. Table 72 describes the parameters and variables of this command.
Table 72 copy running-config tftp command parameters and variables
Parameter address filename Description Signifies the IP address of the TFTP server Denotes the filename to store configuration commands on the TFTP server
320985-A
The show terminal command is in the exec command mode. The show terminal command has no parameters or variables. Figure 99 shows the output from the show terminal command.
Figure 99 show terminal command output
425-48T(config-if)#show terminal Terminal speed: 9600 Terminal width: 79 Terminal length: 23 425-48T(config-if)#
terminal command
The terminal command configures the settings for the terminal. These settings are transmit and receive speeds, terminal length, and terminal width. The syntax of the terminal command is:
terminal speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}|length <1-132>|width <1-132>
Table 73 describes the parameters and variables for the terminal command.
Table 73 terminal command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables Description
speed Sets the transmit and receive baud rates for the terminal. You can {2400|4800|9600| set the speed at one of the five options shown; default is 9600. 19200|38400} length width Sets the length of the terminal display in characters; default is 24. Sets the width of the terminal displaying characters; default 79.
The show cli command is in the exec command mode. Table 74 describes the parameters and variables for the show cli command.
Table 74 show cli command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables Description Displays general CLI settings. Displays CLI mode. Displays CLI usernames and passwords.
Figure 100 displays the output from the show cli command.
320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 273 Figure 100 show cli command output
425-48T(config)#show cli info Inactivity Timeout: 15 minute(s) Login Timeout: 1 minute(s) Login Retries: 3 More: True Screen Lines: 23 425-48T(config)#RW RW *************** RO RO *************** 425-48T#
The show sys-info command is in the privExec command mode. The show sys-info command has no parameters or variables. Figure 101 displays sample output from the show sys-info command.
274 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Figure 101 show sys-info command output
425-48T(config-if)#show sys-info Operation Mode: Switch MAC Address: 00-0F-CD-BF-1E-80 Reset Count: 35 Last Reset Type: Management Reset Power Status: Primary Power Autotopology: Enabled Local GBIC Type: (port 49) GBIC is missing Local GBIC Type: (port 50) GBIC is missing sysDescr: Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:00 FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 Mfg Date: 05122004 Serial #: SACC2600E5 Operational State:Normal sysObjectID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1 sysUpTime: 0 days, 00:38:44 sysNtpTime: SNTP not synchronized. sysServices: 3 sysContact: c sysName: Ethernet 425-48T sysLocation: 425-48T(config-if)#
boot command
The boot command performs a soft-boot of the switch or stack. The syntax for the boot command is:
boot [default]
320985-A
The boot command is in the privExec command mode. Table 75 describes the parameters and variables for the boot command.
Table 75 boot command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables default Description Restores switch or stack to factory-default settings after rebooting.
Note: When you reset to factory defaults, the stack operational mode, last reset count, and reason for last reset will not be set to factory defaults.
The ip bootp server command is in the config command mode. Table 76 describes the parameters and variables for the ip bootp server command.
Table 76 ip bootp server command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables last|needed|disable| always Description Specifies when to use BootP: lastuse BootP or the last known address neededuse BootP only when needed disablenever use BootP alwaysAlways use BootP
The no ip bootp server command is in the config command mode. The no ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.
The default ip bootp server command is in the config command mode. The default ip bootp server command has no parameters or values.
320985-A
The show tftp-server command is in the privExec command mode. The show tftp-server command has no parameters or variables. Figure 102 shows a sample output of the show tftp-server command.
Figure 102 show tftp-server command output
425-48T(config-if)#show tftp-server TFTP Server IP address : 198.202.188.174 425-48T(config-if)#
tftp-server command
The tftp-server command assigns the address for the stack or switch to use for TFTP services. The syntax of the tftp-server command is:
tftp-server <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>
The tftp-server command is in the config command mode. Table 77 describes the parameters and variables for the tftp-server command.
Table 77 tftp-server command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Description Enter the dotted-decimal IP address of the server you want to use for TFTP services.
no tftp-server command
The no tftp-server command clears the TFTP server IP address to 0.0.0.0. The syntax of the no tftp-server command is:
no tftp-server
The no tftp-server command is in the config command mode. The no tftp-server command has no parameters or values.
The copy config tftp command is in the privExec command mode. Table 78 describes the parameters and variables for the copy config tftp command.
Table 78 copy config tftp command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> filename <WORD> Description Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in dotted-decimal notation. Specifies filename that you want to copy the configuration file onto the TFTP server. Enter the name you want the configuration file to have on the TFTP server.
The copy tftp config command is in the privExec command mode. Table 79 describes the parameters and variables for the copy tftp config command.
Table 79 copy tftp config command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables address <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> filename <WORD> Description Specifies the TFTP server IP address; enter in dotted-decimal notation. Enter the name of the configuration file you want to copy from the TFTP server.
cmd-interface command
The cmd-interface command allows you to set the default management interface when you use the console port or Telnet. The syntax for the cmd-interface command is:
cmd-interface {cli|menu}
Table 80 describes the parameters and variables for the cmd-interface command.
Table 80 cmd-interface command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables cli | menu Description Allows you to set the default management system when using console port or Telnet: clithe system automatically enters the CLI mode and displays the CLI prompt after you enter Crtl+Y menuthe system automatically enters the CI menu mode and displays the menus after you enter Ctrl+Y.
The banner command for displaying banner is in the config mode. Table 81 describes the parameters for the banner command.
Table 81 banner command parameters
Parameters static custom disabled <1-15> LINE Description Displays the default agent-banner. Displays the custom agent-banner. Skips the agent-banner display. Fills the Nth line of the custom banner (1<N<15) with the text specified in LINE.
The show banner command is in the config mode. Table 82 describes the parameters for the banner command.
Table 82 show banner command parameters
Parameters static custom (if empty) Description Displays default banner Displays custom banner Displays static, custom or disabled status if parameter is not entered.
no banner command
The no banner command allows you to clear all lines of a previously stored custom banner. The syntax for the no banner command is:
no banner
The show arp-table command is in the exec command mode. The show arp-table command has no parameters or variables. Figure 103 displays a sample output of the show arp-table command.
Figure 103 show arp-table command output
425-48T#show arp-table Port IP Address MAC Address ---- --------------- ----------------37 192.168.151.1 00:80:2D:6E:47:82 425-48T#
Displaying interfaces
You can view the status of all interfaces on the switch or stack, including MultiLink Trunk membership, link status, autonegotiation, and speed. This section covers: show interfaces command show interfaces config command
320985-A
The show interfaces command is in the exec command mode. Table 83 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces command.
Table 83 show interfaces command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables names <portlist> Description Displays the interface names; enter specific ports if you want to see only those.
Figure 104 displays a sample output of the show interfaces names command.
Figure 104 show interfaces names command output
425_48T SW 1.1 in SC2-02 LAB>show interfaces names 1-3 Port Name ---- ---------------------------------------------------------------1 LabBldg4 2 Testing 3 Floor1Bldg2 425_48T#
Figure 105 Shows a sample output of the show interfaces command without the names variable.
284 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Figure 105 show interfaces command output
425-48T(config-if)#show Status Port Trunk Admin Oper ---- ----- ------- ---1 Enable Down 2 Enable Down 3 Enable Down 4 Enable Down 5 Enable Down 6 Enable Down 7 Enable Down 8 Enable Down 9 Enable Down 10 Enable Down 11 Enable Down 12 Enable Down 13 Enable Down 14 Enable Down 15 Enable Down 16 Enable Down 17 Enable Down 18 Enable Down 19 Enable Down 425-48T(config-if)# interfaces Link ---Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down Down LinkTrap -------Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Auto Flow Negotiation Speed Duplex Control ----------- -------- ------ ------Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Custom Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled
320985-A
Table 83 describes the parameters and variables for the show interfaces config command.
Table 84 show interfaces config command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <portlist> Description Enter the ports you want to display.
Figure 104 displays a sample output of the show interfaces config command.
Figure 106 show interfaces config command output
425 (config)#show interfaces 1/1,1/2 config Status Auto Flow Port Trunk Admin Oper Link LinkTrap Negotiation Speed Duplex Control --------- ----- ------ --- --- ------- ---------- ----- ------ -----1 Enable Down Down Enabled Enabled *****Spanning-tree port configurations***** Port Role State STP Status Oper Status ---- ---------- ---------- ---------- ----------1 Root Forwarding Enabled Enabled
286 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI copy config nvram
The copy config nvram command is in the privExec command mode. The copy config nvram command has no parameters or variables. Note: The system automatically issues the copy config nvram command periodically. See Enabling and disabling autosave on page 287 for details.
The write memory command is in the privExec command mode. The write memory command has no parameters or variables.
The save config command is in the privExec command mode. The save config command has no parameters or variables.
320985-A
The show autosave command is in the privExec command mode. The show autosave command has no parameters or variables. Figure 107 displays sample output from the show autosave command.
288 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Figure 107 show autosave command output
425-48T(config-if)#show autosave Auto Save: Enabled 425-48T(config-if)#
The autosave enable command is in the config command mode. The autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.
The no autosave enable command is in the config command mode. The no autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.
The default autosave enable command is in the config command mode. The default autosave enable command has no parameters or variables.
320985-A
The show sntp command is in the privExec command mode. The show sntp command has no parameters or variables. Figure 108 displays sample output from the show sntp command.
290 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Figure 108 show sntp command output
425-48T(config-if)#show sntp SNTP Status: Primary server address: Secondary server address: Sync interval: Last sync source: Primary server sync failures: Secondary server sync failures: Last sync time: Next sync time: Current time: 425-48T(config-if)#
Disabled 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 24 hours 0.0.0.0 0 0 Not Set Not Set Not Set
The sntp enable command enables SNTP. The syntax for the sntp enable command is:
sntp enable
The sntp enable command is in the config command mode. The sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.
The no sntp enable command is in the config command mode. The no sntp enable command has no parameters or variables.
320985-A
The sntp server primary address command is in the config command mode. Table 85 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server primary address command.
Table 85 sntp server primary address command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <A.B.C.D> Description Enter the IP address of the primary NTP server.
The sntp server secondary address command is in the config command mode.
Table 86 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp server secondary address command.
Table 86 sntp server secondary address command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <A.B.C.D> Description Enter the IP address of the secondary NTP server.
The no sntp server command is in the config command mode. Table 87 describes the parameters and variables for the no sntp server command.
Table 87 no sntp server command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <primary|secondary> Description Enter the NTP server you want to clear: primaryclears the IP address for the primary NTP server secondaryclears the IP address for the secondary NTP server
320985-A
The sntp sync-now command is in the config command mode. The sntp sync-now command has no parameters or variables.
The sntp sync-interval command is in the config command mode. Table 88 describes the parameters and variables for the sntp sync-interval command.
Table 88 sntp sync-interval command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables <0-168> Description Enter the number of hours you want for periodic synchronization with the NTP server. Note: 0 is boot-time only, and 168 is once a week; the default value is 24 hours.
clock time-zone
The clock time-zone command sets the local time zone relative to Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). The syntax for the clock time-zone command is:
clock time-zone <zone> <hours> <minutes>
The clock time-zone command is in the config command mode. Table 89 describes the parameters and variables for the clock time-zone command.
Table 89 clock time-zone command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables zone hours minutes Description Time zone acronym that can be displayed when showing system time (Range: Up to 4 characters) Hours difference from UTC. (Valid Range: 12 to +12) Optional minutes difference from UTC. (Range: 059)
320985-A
no clock time-zone
The no clock time-zone command disables the clock time zone feature. The syntax for the no clock time-zone command is:
no clock time-zone
The no clock time-zone command is in the config command mode. The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.
clock summer-time
The clock summer-time command sets the daylight savings time with start and end dates. The syntax for the clock summer-time command is:
clock summer-time <zone> [date {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>} {<day> <month> <year> <hh:mm>}] [<offset>]
The clock summer-time command is in the config command mode. Table 90 describes the parameters and variables for the clock summer- time command.
Table 90 clock summer-time command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables zone Description The acronym to display when summer time is in effect. If unspecified default to the time zone acronym. (Range: up to 4 characters) The first date specifies when summer time should start and the second date specifies when summer time should end. day: day of the month (Range: 1 to 31) month: month (Range: first three letters by name) hh:mm: time in military format, in hours and minutes Note: <day> <month> parameters can also be entered in order: <month> <day>. Number of minutes to add during summer time (Range: 1 to 1440).
offset
no clock summer-time
The no clock summer-time command disables the daylight savings time feature. The syntax for the no clock summer-time command is:
no clock summer-time
The no clock summer-time command is in the config command mode. The no clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables.
The show clock time-zone command is in the config command mode. The show clock time-zone command has no parameters or variables. Figure 109 displays sample output from the show clock time-zone command.
Figure 109 show clock time-zone output
425 (config)#show clock time-zone Time Zone is set to 'PDT', offset from UTC is -08:00
320985-A
The show clock summer-time command has no parameters or variables. Figure 110 displays sample output from the show clock summer-time command.
Figure 110 show clock summer-time
425(config)#show clock summer-time Summer time is set to: start: 1 April 2006 at 12:00 end: 1 October 2006 at 12:00 Offset: 60 minutes. Timezone will be 'DST'
Enabling Autopology
You can enable the Optivity* Autopology* protocol using the CLI. Refer to www.nortel.com/support for information on Autopology. (The product family for Optivity and Autotopology is Data and Internet.). This section covers the following commands: autotopology command no autotopology command on page 298 default autotopology command on page 298
autotopology command
The autotopology command enables the Autotopology protocol. The syntax for the autotopology command is:
autotopology
The autotopology command is in the config command mode. The autotopology command has no parameters or values.
no autotopology command
The no autotopology command disables the Autotopology protocol. The syntax for the no autotopology command is:
no autotopology
The no autotopology command is in the config command mode. The no autotopology command has no parameters or values.
The default autotopology command is in the config command mode. The default autotopology command has no parameters or values.
The show autotopology settings command is in the privExec mode. The show autotopology settings command has no parameters or variables. Figure 111 displays a sample output of the show autotopology settings command.
320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 299 Figure 111 show autotopology settings command output
425-48T#show autotopology settings Autotopology: Enabled Last NMM Table Change: 1 days, 01:08:24 Maximum NMM Table Entries: 100 Current NMM Table Entries: 7 425-48T#
The show autotopology nmm-table command is in the privExec mode. The show autotopology nmm-table command has no parameters or variables. Figure 112 displays a sample output of the show autotopology nmm-table command.
Figure 112 show autotopology nmm-table command output
425-48T#show autotopology nmm-table LSlot LPort IP Addr Seg ID MAC Addr ----- --------------- -------- -----------0/ 0 192.168.151.175 0x000000 000FCDBF1E81 1/37 192.168.151.1 0x00030d 00802D6E4738 1/37 192.168.151.170 0x000115 000CF8610001 1/37 192.168.151.171 0x000115 000F6A822EC1 1/37 192.168.151.172 0x000115 0009978982C1 1/37 192.168.151.174 0x000113 000F6A823621 1/37 192.168.151.176 0x000107 000F3DE52801
BT -12 12 12 12 12 12 12
lldp command
The lldp command sets the LLDP transmission parameters. The syntax for the lldp command is:
lldp [tx-interval <5-327698>] [tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>] [reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>] [notification-interval <5-3600>]
320985-A
Table 58 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp command.
Table 91 lldp command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables Description Sets the interval between successive transmission cycles. Sets the multiplier for tx-interval used to compute the Time To Live value for the TTL TLV. Sets the delay for re-initialization attempt if the adminStatus is disabled. Sets the minimum delay between successive LLDP frame transmissions. Sets the interval between successive transmissions of LLDP notifications.
tx-interval <5-327698>
tx-hold-multiplier <2-10> reinit-delay <1-10> tx-delay <1-8192> notification-interval <5-3600>
If no parameters are specified, the default lldp command sets all parameters to their default values. The default lldp command is in the config command mode. Table 92 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp command.
Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables Description Sets retransmit interval to the default value (30). Sets transmission multiplier to the default value (4).
tx-interval
tx-hold-multiplier
302 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Table 92 default lldp command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables reinit-delay tx-delay notification-interval Description Sets reinitialize delay to the default value (2). Sets transmission delay to the default value (2). Sets notification interval to the default value (5).
The lldp port config notification command is in the config-if command mode. Table 93 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp port config notification command.
Table 93 lldp port config notification command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the ports affected by the command.
The no lldp port config notification command is in the config-if command mode.
320985-A
Table 94 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp port config notification command.
Table 94 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the ports affected by the command.
The default lldp port config notification command is in the config-if command mode. Table 94 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp port config notification command.
Table 95 no lldp port config notification command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the ports affected by the command.
Table 96 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp tx-tlv command.
Table 96 lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> port-desc sys-name sys-desc sys-cap local-mgmt-addr Description Specifies the ports affected by the command. Port description TLV System name TLV System description TLV System capabilities TLV Local management address TLV
The no lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode. Table 97 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp tx-tlv command.
Table 97 no lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> port-desc sys-name sys-desc sys-cap local-mgmt-addr Description Specifies the ports affected by the command. Port description TLV. System name TLV System description TLV System capabilities TLV Local management address TLV
320985-A
The default lldp tx-tlv command is in the config-if command mode. Table 97 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp tx-tlv command.
Table 98 default lldp tx-tlv command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> port-desc sys-name sys-desc sys-cap local-mgmt-addr Description Specifies the ports affected by the command. Port description TLV. (default value is false: not included) System name TLV (default value is false: not included) System description TLV (default value is false: not included) System capabilities TLV (default value is false: not included) Local management address TLV (default value is false: not included)
Table 99 describes the parameters and variables for the lldp port status command.
Table 99 lldp port status command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the ports affected by the command. Enables LLDPU receive only. Enables LLDPU transmit and receive. Enables LLDPU transmit only.
The no lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode. Table 100 describes the parameters and variables for the no lldp port status command.
Table 100 no lldp port status command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the ports affected by the command.
320985-A
The default lldp port status command is in the config-if command mode. Table 101 describes the parameters and variables for the default lldp port status command.
Table 101 default lldp port status command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the ports affected by the command.
The show lldp command is in the exec command mode. Table 102 describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp command.
Table 102 show lldp command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables local-sys-data mgmt-sys-data stats Description Displays local LLDP system data. Displays LLDP management data. Displays LLDP statistics.
Figure 113 displays the output from the show lldp local-sys-data command.
Figure 113 show lldp local-sys-data command output
425>show lldp local-sys-data ------------------------------------------------------------------------LLDP local-sys-data chassis ------------------------------------------------------------------------ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId SysName SysCap Supported Enabled SysDesc ------------------------------------------------------------------------MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:dd 425 B B Ethernet Switch 425-48T HW:0C FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------LLDP local-sys-data port ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Num PortIdSubtype PortId PortDesc -----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:00 port1 1/2 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:01 port2 1/3 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:02 port3 1/4 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:03 port4 1/5 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:04 port5 1/6 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:05 port6 1/7 MAC address 00:0b:8c:6d:cc:06 port7 ----More (q=Quit, space/return=Continue)---Sys capability: O-Other; R-Repeater; B-Bridge; W-WLAN accesspoint; r-Router; T-Telephone; D-DOCSIS cable device; S-Station only.
320985-A
Figure 114 displays the output from the show lldp mgmt-sys-data command.
Figure 114 show lldp mgmt-sys-data command output
425>show lldp mgmt-sys-data ------------------------------------------------------------------------lldp mgmt-sys-data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------MgmtAddr MgmtIfId MgmtAddrOID ------------------------------------------------------------------------ipV4 10.128.100.100 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 115 displays the output from the show lldp stats command.
Figure 115 show lldp stats command output
425>show lldp stats ------------------------------------------------------------------------lldp stats ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------LastChange RemTable RemTable RemTable RemTable Time Inserts Deletes Drops Ageouts ------------------------------------------------------------------------00:01:18.00 1 0 0 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Table 102 describes the parameters and variables for the show lldp port command.
Table 103 show lldp port command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> neighbor Description Specifies the ports affected by the command. Displays LLDP neighbors.
neighbor-mgmt-addr Displays LLDP management addresses for neighbors. rx-stats tx-stats tx-tlv Displays LLDP receive statistics. Displays LLDP transmit statistics. Displays LLDP transmit TLVs.
Figure 116 displays the output from the show lldp port neighbor command.
Figure 116 show lldp port neighbor command output
425>show lldp port 1/1 neighbor -----------------------------------------------------------------------lldp neighbor ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Time Index ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId SysCap Supported Enabled -----------------------------------------------------------------------SysName PortIdSubtype PortId PortDesc -----------------------------------------------------------------------SysDesc -----------------------------------------------------------------------3/1 78 1 MAC address 00:09:68:b2:9d:60 B B 425 stacks v360 MAC address 00:09:68:b2:9d:82 port24 Ethernet Switch 425-24T HW:0B FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------Sys capability: O-Other; R-Repeater; B-Bridge; W-WLAN accesspoint; r-Router; T-Telephone; D-DOCSIS cable device; S-Station only.
320985-A
Figure 117 displays the output from the show lldp port
neighbor-mgmt-addr command. Figure 117 show lldp port neighbor-mgmt-addr command output
425>show lldp port 1/1 neighbor-mgmt-addr -----------------------------------------------------------------------lldp neighbor-mgmt-addr ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Time Index ChassisIdSubtype ChassisId PortIdSubtype PortId MgmtAddr MgmtIfId MgmtAddrOID -----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 439194 5 MAC address 00:09:97:a2:9d:80 MAC address 00:09:97:a2:9d:98 ipV4 10.128.100.13 0 1.3.6.1.4.1.45.3.57.2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 118 displays the output from the show lldp rx-stats command.
Figure 118 show lldp port rx-stats command output
425>show lldp port 1/1 rx-stats -----------------------------------------------------------------------lldp rx-stats ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Frames Frames Frames TLVs TLVs AgeOuts Num Discarded Errors Total Discarded Unrecognized -----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 0 105 0 0 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 119 displays the output from the show lldp tx-stats command.
312 Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI Figure 119 show lldp port tx-stats command output
425>show lldp port 1/1 tx-stats ------------------------------------------------------------------------lldp tx-stats ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Frames ------------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 123 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Figure 120 displays the output from the show lldp stats command.
Figure 120 show lldp port tx-tlv command output
425>show lldp port 1/1 tx-tlv -----------------------------------------------------------------------lldp port tlvs ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Port PortDesc SysName SysDesc SysCap MgmtAddr -----------------------------------------------------------------------1/1 true true true true false
320985-A
Configuring UI button
ui-button enable command
The ui-button enable command enables the UI button. The syntax for the ui-button enable command is:
ui-button enable
The ui-button enable command is in the privExec mode. The ui-button enable command has no parameters or variables. Figure 121 displays a sample output of the ui-button enable command.
Figure 121 ui-button enable command output
425-48T(config)#ui-button enable 425-48T(config)#
The ui-button unit command is in the config command mode. The ui-button unit command has no parameters or variables.
show ui-button
You can check if the UI button is enabled or disabled using the show ui button command. The syntax for the show ui-button command is:
show ui-button
The show ui-button command is in the privExec command mode. The show ui-button command has no parameters or variables. Figure 122 displays sample output from the show ui-button command.
Figure 122 show ui-button command output
425-48T#show ui-button Unit # Button Mode ------ ------------1 Enabled 425-48T#
320985-A
The default ui-button command is in the config command mode. The default ui-button command has no parameters or values.
no ui-button command
The no ui-button command disables the UI button. The syntax for the no ui-button command is:
no ui-button
The no ui-button command is in the config command mode. The no ui-button command has no parameters or values.
Upgrading software
You can download the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image that is located in non-volatile flash memory. To download the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image, a properly configured Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server must be present in your network, and the policy switch must have an IP address. To learn how to configure the switch or stack IP address, refer to Assigning and clearing IP addresses on page 252. Caution: Do not interrupt power to the device during the software download process. A power interruption can corrupt the firmware image. This section covers:
download command
download command
The download command upgrades the software for the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425. You can upgrade both the software image and the diagnostics image. If you upgrade to a stack configuration, the entire stack will be upgraded, and the new image is loaded onto every unit of the stack. Note: The system resets after downloading a new image.
The download command is in the privExec command mode. Note: You can use the download command without parameters. The system displays the most recently used TFTP serve IP address and file name; if you still want to use these, press Enter You can also change these. Table 105 describes the parameters and variables for the download command.
Table 105 download command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables address <ip> Description Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server you want to use. Note: If this parameter is omitted, the system goes to the server specified by the tftp-server command. Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image you want to download. Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 software image of the newer version you want to download.
320985-A
Chapter 7 System configuration using the CLI 317 Table 105 download command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables diag <filename> no-reset Description Enter the name of the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 diagnostics image you want to download. Download the specified software without resetting the unit.
The software download process automatically completes without user intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to 10 minutes, depending on network conditions). When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self-test. The system returns a message after successfully downloading a new image. Figure 123 shows a sample output of the download command.
Figure 123 download message for Ethernet Switch 425-48T
Download Image [/] Saving Image [-] Finishing Upgrading Image
During the download process, the Ethernet Switches 325 and 425 is not operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications.
320985-A
319
Table 106 describes the parameters and variables for the shutdown [port <portlist>] command.
Table 106 shutdown [port <portlist>] command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to shut down or disable. Enter the port numbers you want to disable. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
The shutdown [port <portlist>] command is in the config-if command mode. Figure 124 displays sample output from the shutdown [port <portlist>] command.
Figure 124 shutdown [port <portlist>] command output
425-48T(config-if)#shutdown port 2 425-48T(config-if)#
no shutdown command
The no shutdown command enables the port. The syntax for the no shutdown command is:
no shutdown [port <portlist>]
320985-A
Table 107 describes the parameters and variables for the no shutdown command.
Table 107 no shutdown command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to enable. Enter the port numbers you want to disable. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
Naming ports
You can name a port using the CLI. This section covers the following commands: name command no name command on page 322 default name command on page 322
name command
The name command allows you to name ports or to change the name. The syntax for the name command is:
name [port <portlist>] <LINE>
Table 108 describes the parameters and variables for the name command.
Table 108 name command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to name. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command. <LINE> Enter up to 26 alphanumeric characters.
no name command
The no name command clears the port names; it resets the field to an empty string. The syntax for the no name command is:
no name [port <portlist>]
The no name command is in the config-if command mode. Table 109 describes the parameters and variables for the no name command.
Table 109 no name command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to clear of names. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
Table 110 describes the parameters and variables for the default name command.
Table 110 default name command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to clear of names. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
speed command
The speed command sets the speed of the port. The syntax for the speed command is:
speed [port <portlist>] {10|100|1000|auto}
Table 111 describes the parameters and variables for the speed command.
Table 111 speed command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to configure the speed. Enter the port numbers you want to configure. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command. 10|100|1000|auto Sets speed to: 1010 Mb/s 100100 Mb/s 10001000 Mb/s or 1 GB/s autoautonegotiation
Note: When you set the port speed for autonegotiation, ensure that the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation.
320985-A
Table 112 describes the parameters and variables for the default speed command.
Table 112 default speed command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to set the speed to factory default. Enter the port numbers you want to set. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
duplex command
The duplex command specifies the duplex operation for a port. The syntax for the duplex command is:
duplex [port <portlist>] {full|half|auto}
The duplex command is in the config-if command mode. Table 113 describes the parameters and variables for the duplex command.
Table 113 duplex command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port number to configure the duplex mode. Enter the port number you want to configure, or all to configure all ports simultaneously. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command. full|half|auto Sets duplex to: fullfull-duplex mode halfhalf-duplex mode autoautonegotiation
Note: When you set the duplex mode for autonegotiation, ensure that the other side of the link is also set for autonegotiation.
The default duplex command is in the config-if command mode. Table 114 describes the parameters and variables for the default duplex command.
Table 114 default duplex command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to reset the duplex mode to factory default values. Enter the port numbers you want to configure, or all to configure all ports simultaneously. The default value is autonegotiation. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
320985-A
flowcontrol command
The flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and controls the traffic rates during congestion. The syntax for the flowcontrol command is:
flowcontrol [port <portlist>] {asymmetric|symmetric|auto|disable}
The flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode. Table 115 describes the parameters and variables for the flowcontrol command.
Table 115 flowcontrol command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to configure for flow control. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command. asymmetric|symmetric| Sets the mode for flow control: auto|disable asymmetricenables the local port to perform flow control on the remote port symmetricenables the local port to perform flow control autosets the port to automatically determine the flow control mode (default) disabledisables flow control on the port
no flowcontrol command
The no flowcontrol command is used only on Gigabit Ethernet ports and disables flow control. The syntax for the no flowcontrol command is:
no flowcontrol [port <portlist>]
Table 116 describes the parameters and variables for the no flowcontrol command.
Table 116 no flowcontrol command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to disable flow control. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
The default flowcontrol command is in the config-if mode. Table 117 describes the parameters and variables for the default flowcontrol command.
Table 117 default flowcontrol command parameters and variables
Parameters and variables port <portlist> Description Specifies the port numbers to default to auto flow control. Note: If you omit this parameter, the system uses the port number you specified in the interface command.
320985-A
Enabling rate-limiting
You can limit the percentage of multicast traffic, or broadcast traffic, or both using the CLI. For more information about rate-limiting, refer to Rate Limiting Configuration screen on page 115. This section covers: show rate-limit command rate-limit command on page 330 no rate-limit command on page 330 default rate-limit command on page 331
The show rate-limit command is in the privExec command mode. The show rate-limit command has no parameters or variables. Figure 125 displays sample output from the show rate-limit command.
Figure 125 show rate-limit command output
425-48T#show rate-limit Packet Type Limit ----------- ----Both 0 pps 425-48T#
rate-limit command
The rate-limit command configures rate-limiting on the switch. The syntax for the rate-limit command is:
rate-limit [multicast <pct>] [broadcast <pct>] [both <pct>]
The rate-limit command is in the config-if command mode. Table 118 describes the parameters and variables for the rate-limit command.
Table 118 rate-limit command parameters and variables
Parameters and values Description Applies rate-limiting to the type of traffic. Enter an integer between 1 and 10 to set the rate-limiting percentage: multicastapplies rate-limiting to multicast packets broadcastapplies rate-limiting to broadcast packets bothapplies rate-limiting to both multicast and broadcast packets
no rate-limit command
The no rate-limit command disables rate-limiting on the switch. The syntax for the no rate-limit command is:
no rate-limit
320985-A
The show auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the userExec command mode. Table 119 describes the parameters and variables for the show auto-negotiation-advertisements command.
Table 119 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command
Parameters and values Description Enter ports for which you want the current autonegotiation advertisements displayed.
port <portlist>
Figure 126 displays sample output from the show auto-negotiation-advertisements command.
Figure 126 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command output
425-48T(config-if)#show auto-negotiation-advertisements port 4,8,10 Port Autonegotiation Advertised Capabilities ---- ---------------------------------------------------------------4 10Full 8 10Full 10 10Full 425-48T(config-if)#
320985-A
Table 120 describes the parameters and variables for the show auto-negotiation-capabilities command.
Table 120 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command
Parameters and values Description Enter ports for which you want the autonegotiation capabilities displayed.
port <portlist>
Figure 127 displays sample output from the show auto-negotiation-capabilities command.
Figure 127 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command output
425-48T(config-if)#show auto-negotiation-capabilities port 5,6,10 Port Autonegotiation Capabilities ---- ---------------------------------------------------------------5 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half 6 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half 10 10Full 10Half 100Full 100Half 425-48T(config-if)#
auto-negotiation-advertisements command
The auto-negotiation-advertisements command configures advertisements for the switch. The syntax for the auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:
auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>] [10-full] [10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full] [1000-half] [asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame] [none]
Table 121 describes the parameters and variables for the auto-negotiation-advertisements command.
Table 121 auto-negotiation-advertisements command
Parameters and values Description Enter ports for which you want to configure advertisements. These are speed-duplex-pause settings. Any combination of these settings is allowed, but parameters must be given in the order shown.
port <portlist> [10-full] [10-half] [100-full] [100-half] [1000-full] [1000-half] [asymm-pause-frame] [pause-frame] none
no auto-negotiation-advertisements command
The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command clears all advertisements for the switch. This command is used for testing. The syntax for the no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is:
no auto-negotiation-advertisements [port <portlist>]
Note: The use of this command affects traffic and brings down the link.
The no auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface configuration command mode. Table 122 describes the parameters and variables for the no auto-negotiation-advertisements command.
Table 122 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command
Parameters and values Description Enter ports for which you want to clear all advertisements.
port <portlist>
320985-A
The default auto-negotiation-advertisements command is in the interface configuration command mode. Table 123 describes the parameters and variables for the default auto-negotiation-advertisements command.
Table 123 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command
Parameters and values Description Enter ports for which you want to set default advertisements.
port <portlist>
This feature allows you to customize the capabilities that you advertise. It also allows you to control the capabilities that are advertised by the Ethernet switch as part of the auto-negotiation process.
320985-A
337
The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Unit dialog box and details about each item on the tab.
Unit tab
To open the Unit tab:
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit.
The Unit dialog box (Figure 128) opens with the Unit tab displayed.
Figure 128 Unit dialog box
320985-A
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > Unit. The Unit dialog box opens with the Unit tab displayed (Figure 128 on page 338).
Click the Rate Limit tab. The Rate limit tab opens (Figure 129).
Enable
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.
The Edit IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed. The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > IP dialog box and details about each item on the tab.
Globals tab
To open the Globals tab:
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP.
The IP dialog box opens (Figure 130) with the Globals tab displayed.
Figure 130 Globals tab
ReasmTimeout
320985-A
Addresses tab
The Addresses tab shows the IP address information for the device. To open the Addresses tab: 1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP. The IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed (Figure 130 on page 340). 2 Click the Addresses tab. The Addresses tab opens (Figure 131).
Figure 131 Edit IP dialog box IP Address tab
ReasmMaxSize
ARP tab
The ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) tab shows the MAC addresses and the associated IP addresses for the switch. To open the ARP tab: 1 From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > IP. The IP dialog box opens with the Globals tab displayed (Figure 130 on page 340). 2 Click the ARP tab. The ARP tab opens (Figure 132).
Figure 132 Edit IP dialog box ARP tab
320985-A
The following sections provide a description of the tabs in the Edit > Chassis dialog box and details about each field on the tab.
System tab
You can use the System tab to specify tracking information for a device, device descriptions, and so on. To open the System tab: 1 2 Select the chassis. From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis. The Chassis dialog box opens with the System tab displayed (Figure 133).
344 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 133 Edit Chassis dialog box System tab
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 345 Table 129 System tab fields (continued)
Field AuthenticationTraps Description Click to enable or disable. When you enable, SNMP traps are sent to trap receivers for all SNMP access authentication. When you disable, no traps are received. To view traps, click the Trap toolbar button.
By default, the switch will be in the Running mode. The reboot command initiates a hardware reset. Click to enable or disable. When you enable, AutoPVID is activated. When you disable, AutoPVID is inactivated. The transport protocol(s) to use after the next boot of the agent. The current transport protocol(s) that the agent supports. This setting determines how the management interface of the switch will be assigned an IP address, the next time the switch boots. The four BootMode options are: local - use the IP address contained in the configuration file. net - always attempt to get an IP address from the network. netWhenNeeded - attempt to get an IP address from the network only when one is not contained in the configuration file. netOrLastAddress - attempt to get an IP address from the network and if that fails use the IP address that was in use on this switch before the last reboot. The source from which the agent image is loaded at the next boot. The version number of the agent image that is currently used on the switch.
ImageLoadMode CurrentImageVersion
LocalStorageImageVersion The version number of the agent image that is stored in flash memory on the switch. NextBootDefaultGateway CurrentDefaultGateway The IP address of the default gateway for the agent to use after the next time the switch is booted. The IP address of the default gateway that is currently in use.
346 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Table 129 System tab fields (continued)
Field NextBootLoadProtocol LastLoadProtocol Description The transport protocol to be used by the agent to load the configuration information and the image at the next boot. The transport protocol last used to load the image and configuration information on the switch.
320985-A
OperState Location
348 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 135 Edit Chassis dialog box Stack Info tab
LstChng
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 349 Table 131 Stack Info tab fields (continued)
Field OperState Description The current operational state of the component. The possible values are: othersome other state notAvailstate not available removedcomponent removed disabledoperation disabled normalnormal operation resetInProgreset in progress testingdoing a self test warningoperating at warning level nonFatalErroperating at error level fatalErrerror stopped operation The allowable (and meaningful) values are determined by the component type. The version number of the component or subcomponent. If not available, the value is a zero length string. The serial number of the component or subcomponent. If not available, the value is a zero length string.
Ver SerNum
Agent tab
The Agent tab provides read-only information about the addresses that the agent software uses to identify the switch. To open the Agent tab: 1 2 Select the chassis. From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis. The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab displayed. 3 Click the Agent tab. The Agent tab opens (Figure 136).
350 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 136 Edit Chassis dialog box Agent tab
ValidFlag
BootRouterAddr MacAddr
PowerSupply tab
The PowerSupply tab provides read-only information about the operating status of the switch power supplies. To open the PowerSupply tab: 1 2
320985-A
Select the chassis. From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis.
The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab displayed. 3 Click the PowerSupply tab. The PowerSupply tab opens (Figure 137).
Figure 137 Edit Chassis dialog box Power Supply tab
Fan tab
The Fan tab provides read-only information about the operating status of the switch fans. To open the Fan tab: 1 2 Select the chassis. From the shortcut menu, choose Edit > Chassis. The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab displayed. 3 Click the Fan tab. The Fan tab opens (Figure 138).
Figure 138 Edit Chassis dialog box Fan tab
320985-A
Banner tab
The Banner tab allows you to specify banner display in TELNET. You can specify either the default banner or a custom banner. To open the Banner tab: 1 2 Select the chassis. From the main menu, choose Edit > Chassis. The Chassis dialog box opens (Figure 133 on page 344) with the System tab displayed. 3 Click the Banner tab. The Banner tab opens (Figure 139).
354 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 139 Edit Chassis dialog box Banner tab
To set the default banner: 1 In the Banner tab, click on the static radio button, and then click Apply. This resets the banner in Telnet to the default banner.
To check that the default banner is set in Telnet: 2 In the Main Menu, click on Device > Telnet. The Telnet window opens (Figure 139) with the default banner displayed.
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 355 Figure 140 Telnet window with default banner
### ### ########### ########## ############# ########### ### #### ### ############# ############ ############# ########### ### ##### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ###### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ############ ### ######### ### ### ### ### ### ### ########### ### ######### ### ### ###### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ##### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### ### #### ############# ### ### ### ########### ########### ### ### ########### ### ### ### ########### ###########
Enter Ctrl-Y to begin. *************************************************************** *** Ethernet Switch 425-24T *** *** Nortel *** *** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved *** *** Release 3.6 *** *** HW:0A FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 *** ***************************************************************
In the Banner tab, click on the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.
To check that the banner is disabled:
356 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 141 Telnet window without banner
Ethernet Switch 425-24T Main Menu IP Configuration/Setup... SNMP Configuration... System Characteristics... Switch Configuration... Console/Comm Port Configuration... Spanning Tree Configuration... TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration... Software Download... Configuration File... Display System Log... Reset... Reset to Default Settings... Shutdown Command... Command Line Interface... Logout...
Use arrow keys to highlight option, press <Return> or <Enter> to select option
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 357 Figure 142 Edit Chassis dialog box Custom Banner tab
To create a Custom Banner: 1 2 3 In the Banner tab, click on the custom radio button, and then click Apply. Click on the Custom Banner tab (Figure 142). In the Custom Banner tab, make the changes to the lines of the banner that you want to create, and click Apply. The custom banner is 15 lines high and can be up to 80 characters long.
To check that the custom banner is set in Telnet: 1 In the Main menu, click on Device > Telnet. The Telnet window opens (Figure 143) with the custom banner displayed.
358 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Figure 143 Telnet window with custom banner
****************************************************************************** Ethernet Switches 325/425 ******************************************************************************
Enter Ctrl-Y to begin. *************************************************************** *** Ethernet Switch 425-24T *** *** Nortel *** *** Copyright (c) 1996-2005, All Rights Reserved *** *** Release 3.6 *** *** HW:0A FW:3.5.0.2 SW:v3.6.0 *** ***************************************************************
In the Banner tab, click the disabled radio button, and then click Apply.
To check that the banner is disabled:
From the Device Manager main menu, choose Edit > File System.
The FileSystem dialog box opens (Figure 144) and displays the Config/ Image/Diag tab.
Figure 144 FileSystem - Config/Image/Diag File tab dialog box
Table 135 describes the FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields.
Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields
Field LoadServerAddr Description The IP address of the load server for the configuration file and/or the image file. If not used, then the value is 0.0.0.0.
BinaryConfigFile Name of the configuration file currently associated with the interface. Name When not used, the value is a zero length string. ImageFileName FwFileName (Diag) Name of the image file(s) currently associated with the interface. When the object is not used, the value is a zero length string. Specifies the FWFileName.
360 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Table 135 FileSystem Config/Image/Diag file dialog box fields (continued)
Field Action Description This object is used to download or upload a config file, an image file or diag firmware file. In read operation, if there is no action taken since the boot up, it will return with a value of other. Otherwise, it will return the latest action. In a write operation, the values that can be written are: dnldConfig dnldImg upIdConfig dnldFw dnldImgIfNewer dnldImgNoReset dnldFwNoReset The newly downloaded config, image or diag file will not take effect until the next boot cycle of the device.
Status
This object is used to get the status of the latest action as shown by s5AgInfoFileAction. The values that can be read are: other if no action taken since the boot up inProgress the operation is in progress success the operation succeeds fail the operation failed
In the File System dialog box, click on the ASCII Config File tab.
The ASCII Config File tab (Figure 145) opens.
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 361 Figure 145 File system - ASCII Config File dialog box
Configuring SNTP
The SNTP dialog box contains the parameters for configuring Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). To open the SNTP dialog box: 1 From the Main Menu, choose Edit > SNTP. The SNTP dialog box opens (Figure 146).
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 363 Figure 146 SNTP dialog box
364 Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager Table 137 SNTP dialog box fields (continued)
Field LastSyncTime LastSyncSource NextSyncTime PrimaryServer SynchFailures SecondaryServer SynchFailures CurrentTime Description Specifies the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) when the device last synchronized with an NTP server. Specifies the IP source address of the NTP server with which this device last synchronized Specifies the the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) at which the next synchronization is scheduled. Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize with the primary server address. However, synchronization with the secondary server address may still occur. Specifies the number of times the switch failed to synchronize with the secondary server address, Specifies the switch's current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
Note: In order to clear out the PrimaryServerAddress and SecondaryServerAddress, you must first set the State to disabled.
Topology tab
To view topology information:
From the Device Manager menu bar, select Edit > Diagnostics.
The Diagnostics dialog box opens with the Topology tab displayed (Figure 147).
320985-A
Chapter 9 Configuring the switch using Device Manager 365 Figure 147 Diagnostics dialog box Topology tab
NmmLstChg
NmmMaxNum NmmCurNum
320985-A
367
Note: When you edit a single port, tabs that are not applicable are not available for you to select. When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable. When the option does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed. The following sections provide a description of the Edit Port dialog box, and details about the fields in the Interface tab: Interface tab for a single port Interface tab for multiple ports on page 372
The Port dialog box for a single port opens with the Interface tab displayed (Figure 149).
320985-A
Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 369 Figure 149 Port dialog box Interface tab
Note: 10/100BASE-TX ports may not autonegotiate correctly with older 10/100BASE-TX equipment. In some cases, the older devices can be upgraded with new firmware or driver revisions. If an upgrade does not allow autonegotiation to correctly identify the link speed and duplex settings, you can manually configure the settings for the link in question.
Table 140 describes the Interface tab fields for a single port.
Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port
Field Index Name Descr Type Mtu PhysAddress AdminStatus Description A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges between 1 and 512. Specifies a name for the port. The type of switch and number of ports. The media type of this interface. The size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received on the interface. The MAC address assigned to a particular interface. The current administrative state of the device, which can be one of the following: up down When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state (or remains in the up state) as a result of either management action or the configuration information available to the managed system. The current operational state of the interface, which can be one of the following: up down testing If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down, then OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. The value of sysUpTime at the time the interface entered its current operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value is zero. Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this interface Current speed. Indicates whether this port is enabled for autonegotiation or not. The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full). The current mode of the port (half duplex or full duplex).
OperStatus
LastChange
320985-A
Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 371 Table 140 Interface tab fields for a single port (continued)
Field AdminSpeed OperSpeed AutoNegotiationCapability AutoNegotiationAdvertisments MltId IsPortShared Description Set the ports speed. The current operating speed of the port. Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can support on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using auto-negotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during link negotiation. The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any). Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may be active at a time. Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared port.
PortActiveComponent
Note: When you edit multiple ports, some tabs are not available, and
some tabs are available even though the options are not applicable. When the option does not apply for a given port, NoSuchObject is displayed.
Table 141 describes the Interface tab fields for multiple ports.
Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports
Field Index Port Name Descr Type Description A unique value assigned to each interface. The value ranges between 1 and 512. Number of Unit and Port Number. Allows you to enter a character string to name the port Type of switch and number of ports. Media type for this interface.
320985-A
Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager 373 Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports (continued)
Field Mtu PhysAddress AdminStatus Description Size of the largest packet, in octets, that can be sent or received on the interface. MAC address assigned to a particular interface. Current administrative state of the device, which can be one of the following: up down When a managed system is initialized, all interfaces start with AdminStatus in the up state. AdminStatus changes to the down state (or remains in the up state) as a result of either management action or the configuration information available to the managed system. Current operational state of the interface, which can be one of the following: up down testing If AdminStatus is up, then OperStatus should be up if the interface is ready to transmit and receive network traffic. If AdminStatus is down, then OperStatus should be down. It should remain in the down state if and only if there is a fault that prevents it from going to the up state. The testing state indicates that no operational packets can be passed. Value of the time the interface entered its current operational state. If the current state was entered prior to the last reinitialization of the local network management subsystem, the value is zero. Specifies whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for this interface The estimate bandwidth of the interface in bits per second (bps). For interfaces that do not vary in bandwidth or have no way to estimate the bandwidth, this object should contain the nominal bandwidth. If the bandwidth of the interface is greater than the maximum value reported by the object, then the object displays its maximum value (4,294,967,295). For a sub-layer that has no concept of bandwidth, the object should be zero. Indicates whether the port is enabled (checked) for autonegotiation or not. The current administrative duplex mode of the port (half or full). Indicate current duplex value of the port. Set the speed of a port: none, mbps10, and mbps100 The current operating speed of the port.
OperStatus
LastChange
LinkTrap Speed
374 Chapter 10 Configuring ports using Device Manager Table 141 Interface tab fields for multiple ports (continued)
Field Description
AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex capabilities that a switch can Capability support on a port, and that may be advertised by the port using auto-negotiation AutoNegotiation Specifies the port speed and duplex abilities to be advertised during Advertisments link negotiation. MltId IsPortShared The MultiLink Trunk to which the port is assigned (if any). Specifies whether a port is shared. Multiple ports that are logically represented as a single port are shared. Only one shared port may be active at a time.
PortActiveComp Specifies the physical port components that are active for a shared onent port.
320985-A
375
376
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management Figure 151 System Information page
320985-A
377
Quick Start
The Quick Start feature allows the administrator of the Ethernet Switch 325/425 to make the initial setup by consolidating multiple setup pages into a single page. The Quick Start screen will allow the administrator to configure the following information: Switch/Stack IP address Subnet mask Default gateway SNMP Read community SNMP Write community SNMP Trap IP addresses and communities (up to four) New default VLAN
During the initial setup mode, all ports in the switch or stack are assigned to the new default VLAN. A port-based Quick Start VLAN is created if the new default VLAN does not exist. All ports are removed from the current default VLAN and assigned to the Quick Start VLAN. The PVIDs for all ports are changed to the Quick Start VLAN. The Quick Start VLAN is also designated as the management VLAN. To configure the initial settings using the Quick Start feature: 1 From the main menu, select Administration > Quick Start. The Quick Start page is displayed (Figure 152).
378
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management Figure 152 Quick Start page
320985-A
Chapter 11 Administering the switch using Web-based management Table 143 Items on the Quick Start page
Section Community String Item Read-Only Community String Description Specify a character string to identify the community string for the SNMPv1 Read-Only community, for example, public or private. The default value is public. Specify a character string to identify the community string for the SNMPv1 Read-Write community, for example, public or private. The default value is private. Select the number of the Trap Receiver to create or modify. Specify the network address for the SNMP Manager that is to receive the specified Trap. Type the Community String for the specified Trap Receiver. Specify the IP of the port-based Quick Start VLAN.
379
Trap Receiver
VLAN
380
From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset. The reset warning message displays (Figure 153).
Click OK.
To reboot the Ethernet Switch 425-24T in its stack mode without making changes (since your last Submit request): 1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset. The Reset page opens (Figure 154).
Figure 154 Reset page
320985-A
381
Click Submit. If you do not click Submit, any changes you make will be lost. Note: If you have not configured system password security, a reset returns you to the home page, as shown in Figure 72 on page 200. If you have configured system password security, a reset returns you to a log on page (for details on configuring management passwords, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).
382
Click OK.
To change the Ethernet Switch 425 in its stacking mode to system defaults: 1 From the main menu, choose Administration > Reset to Default. The Reset to Default page opens (Figure 156).
Figure 156 Reset to Default page
Click Submit.
2
320985-A
383
Click OK to log out. Click Cancel to return to the Web-based management interface home page. Note: If you have not configured system password security, a reset returns you to the home page, as shown in Figure 72 on page 200. If you have configured system password security, a reset returns you to a log on page (for details on configuring management passwords, see Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)).
384
320985-A
385
386
From the main menu, choose Configuration > IP. The IP page opens (Figure 158).
320985-A
387
BootP Always
BootP Disabled
388
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
2
320985-A
389
Click Submit.
390
2 3
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management Figure 160 Port Management page
391
Trunk
Status
392
Link Trap
In the upper-left corner, click on the unit number of the Ethernet Switch 425 stack to manage. The page is updated with the information for the selected switch.
3 4
In the port row of your choice, select from the lists. Click Submit.
320985-A
393
Table 147 describes the items on the High Speed Flow Control page.
Table 147 High Speed Flow Control page items
Item Port Autonegotiation (1) Enabled (2) Disabled Range Description The switch port number of the corresponding row. Displays if the autonegotiation feature is enabled or disabled. When enabled, the port advertises support only for 1000Mb/s operation in full-duplex mode. Flow Control (1) Enabled (2) Symmetric (3) Asymmetric Displays current settings of flow control.
394
In the upper-left corner, click on the unit number for viewing the GBIC configuration.
320985-A
395
2 3
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list. Click Submit. The software download process automatically completes without user intervention. The process erases the contents of flash memory and replaces it with a new software image. Take care not to interrupt the download process until after it runs to completion (the process can take up to ten minutes, depending on network conditions). When the download process is complete, the switch automatically resets and the new software image initiates a self-test. During the download process, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 will not be operational. You can monitor the progress of the download process by observing the LED indications.
Table 149 describes the LED indications displayed during the software download process. Note: The LED indications described in Table 149 apply to a 24-port switch model. Although a 48-port switch provides similar LED indications, the LED indication sequence is associated within the 48-port range.
396
The switch downloads the new 100 Mb/s port status LEDs (ports 18 to 24 only): The software image and programs it. LEDs begin to turn on in succession on each ASIC as follows: ASIC 1 from port 1 to port 12 and return, ASIC 2 from with port 24 to port 13 and return, ASIC 3 from port 25 to port 36 and return, ASIC 4 from port 48 to port 37 and return. The switch resets automatically. After the reset completes, the new software image initiates the switch self-test, which comprises various diagnostic routines and subtests. Note: The LEDs display various patterns to indicate that the subtests are in progress.
320985-A
397
Table 150 describes the items displayed on the ASCII Configuration File Download page.
Table 150 Ascii Configuration file download page items
Item Ascii Configuration File Last Manual Configuration Status Submit Description Allows you to select the ASCII config file located on a personal computer. Displays the status of the download. Click on this button to upload the ASCII configuration file from the personal computer to the Ethernet Switch 325/425.
398
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management Figure 164 Configuration File Download/Upload page
Table 151 describes the Configuration File Setting items on the Configuration File Download/Upload page.
Table 151 Configuration File Setting items
Item Configuration Image Filename Range 1..32 Description Type the configuration file name. Type the IP address of the TFTP load host. Choose whether or not to copy the configuration image to the server. Choose whether or not to retrieve the configuration image from a server. If you choose Yes, the download process begins immediately and, when completed, causes the switch or stack to reset with the new configuration parameters.
TFTP Server IP Address XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX Copy Configuration Image to Server Retrieve Configuration Image from Server (1) Yes (2) No (1) Yes (2) No
2 3
320985-A
Type information in the text boxes, or select from a list. Click Submit.
399
Table 152 describes the parameters that are not saved to the configuration file.
Table 152 Parameters not saved to the configuration file
These parameters are not saved: In-Band Stack IP Address In-Band Switch IP Address In-Band Subnet Mask Default Gateway Configuration Image Filename TFTP Server IP Address Configuration File Download/Upload 397 Used in this screen: IP Configuration/Setup See page: 385
400
320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management Figure 165 Console/Communication Port page
401
Caution: If you choose a baud rate that does not match your console terminal baud rate, you will lose communication with the configuration interface when you click Submit.
2 3
402
320985-A
Chapter 12 Configuring the switch using Web-based management Table 154 Rate Limiting page items (continued)
Section Packet Type Limit Description Select the type of packet. Configure the threshold limit for the selected type of packet.
403
2 3
On the Rate Limiting page, type information in the text boxes, or select from a list. Click Submit.
404
320985-A
405
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes how to isolate and diagnose problems with your Ethernet Switch 325/425 and covers the following topics: Interpreting the LEDs Diagnosing and correcting problems on page 405 Normal power-up sequence Port connection problems
Warning: To avoid injury from hazardous electrical current, do not remove the top cover of the device. There are no user-serviceable components inside.
406
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
Vorsicht: Um Verletzungsgefahr durch einen elektrischen Stromschlag auszuschlieen, nehmen Sie niemals die obere Abdeckung vom Gert ab. Im Gerteinnern befinden sich keine Komponenten, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden knnen.
Avertissement: Pour viter tout risque d'lectrocution, ne jamais retirer le capot de l'appareil. Cet appareil ne contient aucune pice accessible par l'utilisateur.
Advertencia: A fin de evitar daos personales por corrientes elctricas peligrosas, no desmonte nunca la cubierta superior de este dispositivo. Los componentes internos no son reparables por el usuario.
Avvertenza: Per evitare lesioni fisiche dovute a scariche pericolose di corrente, non rimuovere mai il coperchio superiore del dispositivo. I componenti interni non possono essere manipolati dall'utente.
320985-A
407
The switch is not receiving AC Verify that the AC power cord is fastened securely power. at both ends and that power is available at the AC power outlet. The fans are not operating or Verify that there is sufficient space for adequate the airflow is blocked, causing airflow on both sides of the switch. the unit to overheat. Note: Operating temperature for the switch must not exceed 40C (104F). Do not place the switch in areas where it can be exposed to direct sunlight or near warm air exhausts or heaters.
The Activity LED for a connected port is off or does not blink (and you have reason to believe that traffic is present).
The switch is experiencing a port connection problem. The switchs link partner is not autonegotiating properly.
Autonegotiation modes
Port connection problems can occur when a port (or station) is connected to another port (or station) that is not operating in a compatible mode (for example, connecting a full-duplex port on one station to a half-duplex port on another station). The Ethernet Switch 325/425 negotiates port speeds according to the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiating standard. The switch adjusts (autonegotiates) its port speed and duplex mode to match the best service provided by the connected station, up to 100 Mb/s in full-duplex mode as follows:
System Configuration Guide
408
Chapter 13 Troubleshooting
If the connected station uses a form of autonegotiation that is not compatible with the IEEE 802.3u autonegotiating standard, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 cannot negotiate a compatible mode for correct operation. If the autonegotiation feature is not present or not enabled at the connected station, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 may not be able to determine the correct duplex modes.
In both situations, the Ethernet Switch 325/425 autosenses the speed of the connected station and, by default, reverts to half-duplex mode. If the connected station is operating in full-duplex mode, it cannot communicate with the switch. To correct this mode mismatch problem: 1 2 Use the Port Configuration screen to disable autonegotiation for the suspect port (see Port Configuration screen on page 109). Manually set the Speed/Duplex field to match the speed/duplex mode of the connected station. You may have to try several settings before you find the correct speed/duplex mode of the connected station. If the problem persists: 1 2 Disable the autonegotiation feature at the connected station. Manually set the speed/duplex mode of the connected station to the same speed/duplex mode you have manually set for the Ethernet Switch 325/425 port.
Port interface
Ensure that the devices are connected using the appropriate crossover or straight-through cable (see Appendix B, Connectors and pin assignments, on page 425), or that autonegotiation is active.
320985-A
409
Note: The term SFP is used in this chapter to describe features or technical specifications of an SFP and a CWDM SFP. This chapter includes the following topics: Guidelines on page 410 Product Description on page 410 Installing SFPs on page 414 Technical Specifications on page 416 How to get help on page 423
410
Guidelines
Before installing an SFP, read the following guidelines: SFP GBICs are static sensitive. To prevent damage from ElectroStatic Discharge (ESD), follow your normal board and component handling procedures. SFP GBICs, are dust sensitive. When you store an SFP GBIC, or when you disconnect it from a fiber optic cable, always keep the dust cover over the SFP GBIC optical bore. To clean contaminants from the optical bores of a SFP GBIC, use an alcohol swab or equivalent to clean the ferrules of the optical connector. Dispose this product (if necessary) according to all national laws and regulations. Warning: Fiber optic equipment can emit laser or infrared light that can injure your eyes. Never look into an optical fiber or connector port. Always assume that fiber optic cables are connected to a light source.
Product Description
This section describes the SFP and label, and provides a model list for 1000BASE-SX, 1000BASE-LX SFPs. This section also describes the Nortel Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexed (CWDM) SFPs and provides a CWDM SFP model list. This section includes the following topics: Locking/extractor mechanisms on page 411 SFP labeling on page 411 SFP models on page 412 CWDM SFP models on page 413
320985-A
411
Locking/extractor mechanisms
Depending on the transceiver manufacturer, an SFP transceiver can have various types of locking/extractor mechanisms. Figure 167 on page 411 shows two types of locking/extractor mechanisms used on SFP and XFP transceivers.
Figure 167 Locking/extractor mechanism
SFP labeling
The Nortel label on a typical SFP contains a Nortel serial number, a bar code, a manufacturers code, an interface type, and a part number. See Figure 168 on page 412.
412
SFP models
SFPs are hot-swappable input/output enhancement components designed for use with Nortel products to allow Gigabit Ethernet ports to link with other Gigabit Ethernet ports over various media types. Table 156 lists and describes the Nortel SFP models that are supported by the Ethernet Switch 425.
Table 156 1000BASE-SFP models
Model number 1000Base-SX SFP GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC). Product Number AA1419013 Description Small Form Factor Pluggable, short wavelength 550 m Small Form Factor Pluggable, short wavelength 550 m Small Form Factor Pluggable, long wavelength 5 km
1-port 1000Base-SX SFP AA1419014 GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: MT-RJ). 1-port 1000Base-LX SFP AA1419015 GBIC (mini-GBIC, connector type: LC).
320985-A
413
Note: The cable distance may vary depending on the quality of fiber optic cable used.
414
Installing an SFP Transceiver Table 157 Nortel CWDM SFP transceiver list (continued)
CWDM SFP 1590nm/Red 1610nm/Brown Product number AA1419031 AA1419039 AA1419032 AA1419040 Cable length 40 KM 70 KM 40 KM 70 KM
Note: The cable distance may vary depending on the quality of fiber optic cable used.
Installing SFPs
Caution: SFPs are keyed to prevent incorrect insertion. If an SFP resists pressure, do not force it; turn it over, and reinsert it. To install an SFP: 1 2 3 4 Remove the SFP from its protective packaging. Verify that the SFP is the correct model for your network configuration. See Table 156 on page 412 for information on the SFPs models supported. Grasp the SFP between your thumb and forefinger. Insert the SFP into the SFP slot on the module. See Figure 169 on page 415. Apply light pressure to the SFP until the device clicks and locks into position in the module.
320985-A
415
Removing an SFP
To remove an SFP 1 2 Disconnect the network fiber cable from the SFP connector. Depending on your SFP model, press the locking/extractor mechanism on the SFP to release the SFP. Note: Your SFP locking/extractor mechanism may be different than the models shown.
416
3 4 5
Slide the SFP out of the module SFP slot. If the SFP does not slide easily from the module slot, use a gentle side-to-side rocking motion while firmly pulling the SFP from the slot. Attach a dust cover over the fiber optic bores and store the SFP in a safe place until needed. Note: If you are discarding the SFP, be sure to dispose the SFP according to national laws and regulations.
Technical Specifications
This section includes the following topics: SFP specifications on page 417 CWDM SFP specifications on page 421
320985-A
417
SFP specifications
This section provides technical specifications for the SFP models and includes the following topics: SFP physical specifications 1000BASE-SX (LC Type) specifications on page 418 1000BASE-LX (LC Type) specifications on page 418 1000BASE-SX (MT-RJ Type) specifications on page 420
418
850 nm 7 dB
Laser Transmitter characteristics Minimum launch power Maximum launch power Receiver characteristics Minimum receiver sensitivity -17 dBm Maximum power input 0 dBm -10 dBm -4 dBm
320985-A
419
Table 160 describes standards, connectors, cabling, and distance for the Model 1000BASE-LX SFPs.
Table 160 1000BASE-LX SFP specifications
Type Standards Connectors Cabling Specification Conforms to the following standards: 802.3z, 1000BASE-LX Duplex LC fiber optic connector Wavelength Optical budget 62.5 m MMF optic cable 50 m MMF optic cable 10 m SMF optic cable 1804 ft. (550 m) using 62.5 m MMF optic cable 1804 ft. (550 m) using 50 m MMF optic cable 16405 ft. (5 km) using 10 m SMF optic cable
Distance
1310 nm 10.5 dB
Laser Transmitter characteristics Minimum launch power Maximum launch power Receiver characteristics Minimum receiver sensitivity -20.0 dBm Maximum power input -3.0 dBm -9.5 dB -3.0 dB
420
320985-A
421
Note: A minimum attenuation of 5 dBm must be present between the transmitter and receiver. To avoid receiver saturation, you must insert a minimum attenuation of 5 dBm when: testing the CWDM SFP in loopback mode. using short runs of fiber with no intermediate CWDM OADM or CWDM OMUX.
To determine the expected signal loss for a CWDM OADM, CWDM OMUX, or fiber length, see Installation and Networking Guidelines for Optical Routing. Given a loss budget of 24 dBm and assuming fiber loss of .25 dB/km, up to 96 km reach is supported with no intermediate CWDM OADM or CWDM OMUX.
422
Note: A minimum attenuation of 5 dBm must be present between the transmitter and receiver. To avoid receiver saturation, you must insert a minimum attenuation of 5 dBm when: testing the CWDM SFP in loopback mode. using short runs of fiber with no intermediate CWDM OADM or CWDM OMUX.
To determine the expected signal loss for a CWDM OADM, CWDM OMUX, or fiber length, see Installation and Networking Guidelines for Optical Routing. Given a loss budget of 24 dBm and assuming fiber loss of .25 dB/km, up to 96 km reach is supported with no intermediate CWDM OADM or CWDM OMUX.
320985-A
423
424
320985-A
425
616EA
426
Table 164 lists the RJ-45 (8-pin modular) port connector pin assignments.
Table 164 RJ-45 port connector pin assignments
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal RX+ RXTX+ Not applicable Not applicable TXNot applicable Not applicable Description Receive Data + Receive Data Transmit Data + Not applicable Not applicable Transmit Data Not applicable Not applicable
320985-A
427
428
Ethernet 325/425 8 1
Switch or hub 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Crossover cable
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
RX+ RXTX+
1 2 3 4 5 R T
TX-
6 7 8
MDI-X port
BS45057B
The DB-9 Console/Comm Port connector (Figure 174) is configured as a data communications equipment (DCE) connector. The DSR and CTS signal outputs are always asserted; the CD, DTR, RTS, and RI signal inputs are not used. This configuration enables a management station (a PC or console terminal) to connect directly to the switch using a straight-through cable.
Figure 174 DB-9 Console port connector
1 5
9
619EA
Table 165 lists the DB-9 Console port connector pin assignments.
320985-A
429
430
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
320985-A
431
432
Default settings
320985-A
433
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
MAC Address Security Configuration Menu screen (see Configuring and
MAC Address Security MAC Address Security SNMP-Locked Partition Port on Intrusion Detected Partition Time DA Filtering on Intrusion Detected
Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Generate SNMP Trap on Intrusion Disabled Clear by Ports Learn by Ports Current Learning Mode Trunk Security NONE NONE Not Learning blank field Disabled MAC Address Security Port Configuration screen (see
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
MAC Address Security Port Lists screens (see Configuring and
Port List
Blank field
Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Find an Address MAC Address Allowed Source Display/Create MAC Address Blank field Blank field (no address assigned) Blank field 00-00-00-00-00-00 MAC Address Security Table screens (see Configuring and Managing
Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
434
Default settings
Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A))
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Unit Port Filter Untagged Frames Port Name PVID Tagging Unit Port PVID Port Name
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
320985-A
435
Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
436
Default settings
Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A))
Rate Limiting Configuration screen on page 115 IGMP Configuration Menu screen (see
Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A))
320985-A
437
Note: The following two fields appear only when the switch is part of a stack configuration. New Unit Number Renumber Units with new setting STP Mode Bridge Priority Bridge Hello Time Bridge Max. Age Time Bridge Forward Delay Time Bridge Max. Age Time Bridge Forward Delay Time Current stack order No IEEE 802.1s 8000 in Hex. 2 seconds 20 seconds 15 seconds 20 seconds 15 seconds Renumber Stack Units screen on page 232 Spanning Tree Group Configuration screen in STPG mode (see
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
438
Default settings
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Spanning Tree Switch Settings screen in STPG mode (see
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Spanning Tree Group Configuration screen in RSTP mode (see
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
128 10 or 100 (1 for Gigabit port) Path Cost = 1000/LAN speed (in Mb/s)
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
320985-A
439
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
State
440
Default settings
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A))
MAC address of the device Enabled Enabled Enabled, Yes 1 minute 3 15 minutes All First field: 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Remaining nine fields: 255.255.255.255 (any address is allowed) TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen on page 234
First field: 0.0.0.0 (no IP address assigned) Remaining nine fields: 255.255.255.255 (any address is allowed)
320985-A
441
Retrieve Configuration Image from No Server ASCII Configuration Filename TFTP Server IP Address Retrieve Configuration File from Server Last Manual Configuration Status Last Auto Configuration Status Auto Configuration on Reset Zero-length string 0.0.0.0 No Passed Passed Disabled ASCII Configuration file Download on page 244
442
Default settings
320985-A
443
444
# The following is a sample of a BootP configuration file that was extracted # from a Nortel EZ LAN network management application. Note that other BootP daemons can use a configuration file with a different format. # # Before using your switch BootP facility, you must customize your BootP # configuration file with the appropriate data. # # Blank lines and lines beginning with '#' are ignored. # # Legend: # # first field -- hostname # ht -- hardware type # ha -- host hardware address # tc -- template host (points to similar host entry) # ip -- host IP address # hd -- bootfile home directory # bf -- bootfile # EZ dt -- device type # EZ fv -- firmware version # EZ av -- agent version # # Fields are separated with a pipe (|) symbol. Forward slashes (/) are # required to indicate that an entry is continued to the next line. #
320985-A
445
# Caution # # Omitting a Forward slash (/) when the entry is continued to the next # line, can cause the interruption of the booting process or the # incorrect image file to download. Always include forward slashes # where needed. # # Important Note: # # If a leading zero (0) is used in the IP address it is calculated as an # octal number. If the leading character is "x" (upper or lower case), # it is calculated as a hexadecimal number. For example, if an IP address # with a base 10 number of 45 is written as .045 in the BOOTPTAB.TXT file, # the Bootp protocol assigns .037 to the client. # # Global entries are defined that specify the parameters used by every device. # Note that hardware type (ht) is specified first in the global entry. # # The following global entry is defined for an Ethernet device. Note that this # is where a client's subnet mask (sm) and default gateway (gw) are defined. # global1|/ |ht=ethernet|/ |hd=c:\opt\images|/ |sm=255.255.255.0|/ |gw=192.0.1.0| # # The following sample entry describes a BootP client:
bay1|ht=ethernet|ha=0060fd000000|ip=192.0.0.1|hd=c:\ezlan\images|bf=bps2000_100.img BS425-24T_100.img
# Where: # host name: # hardware type: # MAC address: # IP address: # home directory of boot file: # boot file:
446
global1|/ |ht=ethernet|/ |hd=c:\opt\images|/ |sm=255.255.255.0|/ |gw=192.0.1.0| # # The following sample entry describes a BootP client: bay1|ht=ethernet|ha=0060fd000000|ip=192.0.0.1 |hd=c:\ezlan\images|bf=Hummingbird_3.5_100.img # Where: # host name: bay1 # hardware type: Ethernet # MAC address: 00-60-FD-00-00-00 # IP address: 192.0.0.0 # home directory of boot file: c:\ezlan\images # boot file: hummingbird_3.5_100.img
320985-A
447
page 332
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 297 page 288 page 280 page 312 page 274
autotopology autosave enable banner [ custom | static | disabled | <1-15> LINE | clear ] blink-leds <off> <stop> boot [default] clear logging [nv]
clear-stats [port<portlist>]
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
448
Command List
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 295
page 132 page 331 page 285 page 278 page 278 page 270 page 335 page 298 page 288 page 131 page 326
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 328
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
320985-A
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 303 page 306 page 301 page 305
default lldp port <portlist> config notification default lldp port <portlist> status default lldp [tx-interval] [tx-hold-multiplier] [reinit-delay] [tx-delay] [notification-interval] default lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] default logging
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
page 146 page 322
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 331
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
System Configuration Guide
450
Command List
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default snmp-server community [ro|rw] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default snmp-server contact Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default snmp-server host Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default snmp-server location Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default snmp-server name Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>] Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) default spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [stp] [learning] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and [cost] [priority] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
default speed [port <portlist>] default ssh [dsa-auth|pass-auth|port|timeout] page 324
default telnet-access
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 315
default ui-button default vlan igmp <1-4094> | unknown-mcast-no-flood default vlan mgmt
Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
320985-A
page 323
eapol [port <portlist>] [init] [status authorized|unauthorized|auto] [traffic-control in-out|in] [re-authentication enable|disable] [re-authentication-period <1-604800>] [re-authenticate] [quiet-interval <num>] [transmit-interval <num>] [supplicant-timeout <num>] [server-timeout <num>][max-request <num>] enable command Enabling CANA end command exit flowcontrol [port <portlist>] {asymmetric|symmetrid|auto|disable} help http-port <1024-65535>
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 132 page 331 page 134 page 134 page 326 page 130
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 133 page 257 page 252 page 275 page 265 page 254
interface FastEthernet {<portlist>} ip address unit <1-8> A.B.C.D ip address[stack|switch] <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [netmask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>] ip bootp server {last|needed|disable|always} ip domain-name [<LINE>] ip default-gateway <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>
452
Command List
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 302
lldp port <portlist> status [rxOnly | txAndRx | txOnly] page 305 lldp [tx-interval <5-327698>] [tx-hold-multiplier <2-10>] [reinit-delay <1-10>] [tx-delay <1-8192>] [notification-interval <5-3600>] lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] logging [enable|disable] [level critical|serious|informational] [nv-level critical|serious|informational|none] page 300
page 303
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
320985-A
logging remote level {critical|informational|serious|none} logout mac-address-table aging-time <time> mac-security [disable|enable] [filtering {enable|disable}] [intrusion-detect {enable|disable|forever}] [intrusion-timer <1-65535>] [learning-ports <portlist>] [learning {enable|disable}]|mac-address-table|mac-da-filter|s ecurity list [snmp-lock {enable|disable}] [snmp-trap {enable|disable}] mac-security [port <portlist>] {disable|enable|learning}
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
page 132 page 145
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) mac-security mac-address-table address <H.H.H.> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel {port <portlist>|security-list <1-32>} Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) mac-security mac-da-filter Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) mac-security security-list <1-32> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software mac-security security-list <portlist> Release 3.6 (320988-A) mlt <id> [name <trunkname>] [enable|disable] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and [member <portlist>][learning {disable|fast|normal}] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches [bpdu{all-ports|single-port}] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
name [port <portlist>] <LINE> no auto-pvid page 321
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
454
Command List
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 298 page 253 page 258 page 276 page 254 page 265 page 264
no flowcontrol [port <portlist>] no ip address {stack|switch} no ip address unit <1-8> no ip bootp server no ip default-gateway no ip domain-name no ip name-server <A.B.C.D> no ipmgr {source-ip [<1-10>]}
no ipmgr {telnet|snmp|http}
no lacp system-priority
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 302 page 306 page 304
no lldp port <portlist> config notification no lldp port <portlist> status no lldp tx-tlv [port <portlist>] [port-desc] [sys-name] [sys-desc] [sys-cap] no logging
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
320985-A
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) no logging remote enable System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) no logging remote level System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) no mac-security Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) no mac-security mac-address-table {address Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel <H.H.H>|port <portlist>|security-list <1-32>] Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) no mac-security mac-da-filter {add|delete}<H.H.H.> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) no mac-security security-list <1-32> Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) no mlt [<id>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
no name [port <portlist>] no port-mirroring page 322
no radius-server
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 330
no rmon event
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
System Configuration Guide
456
Command List
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
page 320
no shutdown [port <portlist>] no snmp server [authentication-trap|community [ro|rw] contact|host [<host-ip> <community-string>] [location|name] no snmp-server
no snmp-server authentication-trap
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
320985-A
no ssh
no ssh dsa-auth
no ssh dsa-host-key
no ssh pass-auth
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 290 page 292
no sntp enable no sntp server <primary|secondary> no spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>]
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 278 page 315
no web-server
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
458
Command List
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A) Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
rate-limit [port <portlist>] {multicast <pct>| broadcast page 330 <pct>| both <pct>} reload [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel] renumber unit restore factory-default [ -y ] rmon alarm <1-65535> <WORD> <1-2147483647> {absolute|delta} rising threshold <-2147483648-2147483647> [<1-65535>] falling-threshold <-2147483648-2147483647> [<1-65535>] [owner <LINE>] rmon event <1-65535> [log] [trap] [description <LINE>] [owner <LINE>] rmon history <1-65535> <LINE> <1-65535> <1-3600> [owner <LINE>] rmon stats <1-65535> <port> [owner <LINE>] page 136 page 143 page 261
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
320985-A
show http-port
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 283 page 284 page 256 page 255 page 262
show interfaces [names] [<portlist>] show interfaces [<portlist>] config show ip address [address [stack|switch]] show ip [bootp] [default-gateway] [address [stack|switch]] show ip dns show ipmgr
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
460
Command List
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 307 page 309
show lldp [local-sys-data] [mgmt-sys-data] [stats] show lldp [port <portlist>] [neighbor] [neighbor-mgmt-addr] [rx-stats] [tx-stats] [tx-tlv] show logging [config] [critical] [informational] [serious] [sort-reverse]
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
show mac-address-table [vid <1-4094>] [aging-time] page 144 [address <H.H.H>] [port <LINE>] [include/exclude <pattern>] show mac-security {config|mac-address-table [address <macaddr>]|port|security-lists|mac-da-filter} show mlt [utilization <1-6>]
show port-mirroring
show qos egressmap ds <1-63> show qos egressmap status show radius-server
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A) Configuring QoS for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320987-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 329
show rate-limit
320985-A
System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A) System Monitoring Guide for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320989-A)
page 269
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 289
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) show spanning-tree mstp config Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) show spanning-tree mstp msti config <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) show spanning-tree mstp msti port config <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and [<portlist>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) show spanning-tree mstp msti port statistics <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and [<portlist>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) show spanning-tree mstp msti statistics <1 - 7> Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) show spanning-tree mstp port config [<portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
System Configuration Guide
462
Command List
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 141 page 138
320985-A
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 271 page 277 page 314
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 134 page 319
shutdown [force] [minutes-to-wait <1-60>] [cancel] shutdown [port <portlist>] snmp-server {enable|disable}
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
464
Command List
snmp-server community <community-string> {read-view <view-name>|write-view <view-name>| notify-view <view-name>} snmp-server contact <text>
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>] <community-string> snmp-server host <host-ip> [port <1-65535>] {<community-string>|v2c <community-string>| v3 {auth|no-auth|auth-priv} <username>} snmp-server location <text>
snmp-server user <username> [read-view <view-name>] [write-view <view-name>] [notify-view <view-name>] [{md5|sha} <password>[read-view <view-name>] [write-view <view-name>][notify-view <view-name>] [{3des|aes|des} <password> [read-view <view-name>] [write-view <view-name>][notify-view <view-name>] snmp-server view <view-name> <OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID> [<OID>]]]]]]]]] snmp trap link-status [port <portlist>]
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 290 page 291
320985-A
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and <portlist>]disable MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) spanning-tree mstp msti <1 - 7> [port <portlist>] Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and [cost <1 - 200000000>][learning {disable | MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches enable}][priority {00 | 10 | | F0}] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) spanning-tree mstp msti<1 Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and 7>[priority{0000|1000||F000}] [add-vlan MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches <vid>][remove-vlan <vid>][enable] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) spanning-tree mstp [port <portlist>] [cost <1 Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and 200000000>][edge-port {false | true}][hello-time <1 - MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 10>] [learning {disable | enable}][p2p {auto | 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
force-false | force-true}][priority {00 | 10 | | F0}] [protocol-migration {false | true}]
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) spanning-tree [port <portlist>] [learning Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and {disable|normal|fast}] [cost <1-65535>] [priority MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches <0-255>] 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) spanning-tree rstp[forward-time<4 - 30>] [hello-time Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and <1 - 10>][max-age <6 - 40>] MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) [pathcost-type{ bits16 | bits32}]
spanning-tree mstp region [config-id-sell <0 - 255>] [region-name <1 - 32 chars>][region-version <0 65535>] [priority{0000|10000|20000| | F0000}] [tx-holdcount<1 - 10>] [version stp-compatible|rstp}]
466
Command List
Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A)
page 323
ssh dsa-host-key
ssh pass-auth
ssh secure
telnet-access [enable|disable] [login-timeout <1-10>] [retry <1-100>] [inactive-timeout <0-60>] [logging {none|access|failures|all}] [source-ip <1-10> <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX> [mask <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>]] terminal speed {2400|4800|9600|19200|38400}|length <1-132>|width <1-132> tftp-server <XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX>
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 271
page 277
320985-A
vlan igmp {<1-4094> [snooping {enable|disable}] [proxy {enable|disable}] [robust-value <value>] [query-interval <time>] [v1-members <portlist>] [v2-members <portlist>] vlan igmp unknown-mcast-no-flood
Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A) Configuring IP Multicast for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320990-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring VLANs, Spanning Tree, and MultiLink Trunking for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320986-A) Configuring and Managing Security for Nortel Ethernet Switches 325 and 425, Software Release 3.6 (320988-A)
page 286
vlan ports [<portlist>] [tagging {enable|disable|tagAll|untagAll|tagPvidOnly| untagPvidOnly}] [pvid <1-4094>] [filter-untagged-frame {enable|disable}] [priority <0-7>] [name <line>] web-server{enable|disable}
write memory
468
Command List
320985-A
469
Environmental specifications
Table 169 lists environmental specifications for the Ethernet Switch 325/425.
Table 169 Environmental specifications
Parameter Temperature Humidity Altitude Operating specification 0 to 40C (32 to 104F) Storage specification -25 to 70C (-13 to 158F)
85% maximum relative humidity, 95% maximum relative humidity, noncondensing noncondensing 3024 m (10,000 ft) 3024 m (10,000 ft)
Electrical parameters
Table 170 lists power electrical parameters for the Ethernet Switch 325/425.
Table 170 Electrical parameters
Parameter Input Voltage Input Power Consumption Input Volt Amperes Rating Electrical specification 100 to 240 VAC @ 47 to 63 Hz 46 W maximum (Ethernet Switch 325) 50 W maximum (Ethernet Switch 425) 65 VA maximum
470
Maximum thermal 75 BTU/hr (Ethernet Switch 325) output 250 BTU/hr (Ethernet Switch 425)
Physical dimensions
Table 171 lists physical dimensions for the Ethernet Switch 325
Table 171 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 325
Parameter Height Width Depth Weight Specifications 2 in (4.37 cm) 17.125 in (43.5 cm) 9.02 in (22.91 cm) 6.2 lb (2.82 kg)
Table 172 lists physical dimensions for the Ethernet Switch 425.
Table 172 Physical dimensions of the Ethernet Switch 425
Parameter Height Width Depth Weight Specifications 1.75 in (4.5 cm) 17.125 in (43.5 cm) 8.0 in (20.32 cm) 6.2 lb (2.82 kg)
320985-A
Technical specifications
471
Performance specifications
Table 173 lists performance specifications for the Ethernet Switch 325.
Table 173 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 325
Parameter Frame Forward Rate (64-byte packets) Port Forwarding/Filtering Performance (64-byte packets) Address Database Size Addressing Frame Length Specifications 3.6 Million packets per second (Mpps) for the Ethernet Switch 325-24T, and 6.6 Mpps for the Ethernet Switch 325-24G. For 10 Mb/s: 14,880 pps maximum For 100 Mb/s: 148,810 pps maximum
8,000 entries at line rate 48-bit MAC address 64 to 1518 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Untagged) 68 to 1522 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Tagged)
Table 174 lists performance specifications for the Ethernet Switch 425.
Table 174 Performance specifications of the Ethernet Switch 425
Parameter Frame Forward Rate (64-byte packets) Port Forwarding/Filtering Performance (64-byte packets) Address Database Size Addressing Frame Length Specifications Up to 3.2 million packets per second (pps) maximum, learned unicast traffic; 5.1 million packets per second (pps) in a stack configuration For 10 Mb/s: 14,880 pps maximum For 100 Mb/s: 148,810 pps maximum
8,000 entries at line rate 48-bit MAC address 64 to 1518 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Untagged) 68 to 1522 bytes (IEEE 802.1Q Tagged)
Data rate
The data rate is 10 Mb/s Manchester encoded or 100 Mb/s 4B/5B encoded.
472
Technical specifications
Electromagnetic emissions
The electromagnetic emission standards for the Ethernet Switch 425-24T: US. CFR47, Part 15, Subpart B, Class A Canada. ICES-003, Issue 2, Class A Australia/New Zealand. AS/NZS 3548:1995, Class A Japan. V-3/97.04:1997, Class A Taiwan. CNS 13438, Class A EN55022:1995, Class A EN61000-3-2:1995 EN61000-3-3:1994
320985-A
Technical specifications
473
Electromagnetic immunity
The Ethernet Switch 325/425 meets the EN50082-1:1997 standard.
474
Technical specifications
320985-A
475
Index
A
AbsoluteValue statistics 187 access 125 access levels 175 accessing the CLI 125 Action field 360 Actions menu 178 Addr field 341 Addresses tab 341 AdminDuplex field 370, 373 administrative options logging out 382 resetting the switch/stack 379 resetting to system defaults 381 security, configuring passwords 379 AdminSpeed field 371, 373 AdminStatus field 370, 373 Agent tab 349, 350 age-out time 143 Alarm Manager button 179 Allowed Source IP Address field 237 Allowed Source Mask field 237 AllowedRatePps field 339 alphabetical list of commands 447 Area Chart button 193 area graph example 188 ARP tab 342 ASCII Config file dialog box 360 ASCII Configuration File Download page 396 System Configuration Guide ASCII Configuration File Download screen 244 ASCII Configuration Filename field 245 ASCIIConfigAutodldStatus field 361 ASCIIConfigAutoDownload field 361 ASCIIConfigFileName field 361 ASCIIConfigManualdldStatus field 361 ASCIIConfigManualDownload field 361 Authentication Trap field 220 AuthenticationTraps field 345 Auto Configuration on Reset field 246 AutoNegotiate field 370, 373 autonegotiation 283, 323 description 54 modes 407 troubleshooting 407 Autonegotiation field 112, 114 auto-negotiation-advertisements command 333 AutoNegotiationAdvertisments field 371, 374 AutoNegotiationCapability field 371, 374 AutoPVID field 345 autosave enabling and disabling 400 Autosave Configuration screen 247 autosave enable command 288 autosense description 54 autotopology command 297 Autotopology field 220 Average statistics 187
476
Index configuration, editing 343 ChassisType field 366 check boxes, about 204 CI Main Menu 126 Clear All Port Statistics option 105 CLI 125 CLI command list, alphabetical 447 clock summer-time command 295 clock time-zone command 294 cmd_interface command 279 color-coded ports 182 Comm Port Data Bits field 225 Comm Port Parity field 225 Comm Port Stop Bits field 225 Command Line Interface option 100 command modes 120, 132, 133 communication parameters, setting for Device Manager 172 Community String field 220 community strings default for Device Manager 175 entering 176 ConfigFileName field 359 Configurable field 215 configuration downloading 358 Configuration File Download/Upload page 397 Configuration File Download/Upload screen 240 Configuration Image Filename field 242 configure command 132 configure network command 266 Confirm row deletion field 174 connectivity 262 connectors 425 DB-9 console/comm port connector 428 RJ-45 port connector 425
B
banner command for displaying banner 280 Banner display control 280 Banner tab 353 Bar Chart button 193 Base Unit Info Tab 346 Base Unit Info tab 346, 347 BcastAddr field 341 BkplType field 366 blinking LEDs 182 blink-leds command 312 boot command 274 Boot Mode Setting field 387 booting the switch 274 BootMode field 345 BootP 255, 274 Always mode 217 BOOTPTAB.TXT file 443 Bootstrap Protocol choosing a request mode 216 Disabled 218 Last Address setting 218 Last BootP field 215 modes 275 Request Mode field 215 sample configuration file 443 When Needed mode 217 bootP configuring 385 request modes 387 BootRouterAddr tab 350 Broadcast Rate Limiting 115 buttons dialog boxes 185 toolbar 178
C
chassis 320985-A
Index Console Interface (CI) logging in 231 console interface (CI) main menu 96 menus, using 94 Console Password field 226 console port default settings 94 Console Port Speed field 225 Console Read-Only Password field 227, 228 Console Read-Write Password field 227, 229 console/comm port configuration screen 223 illustration 428 pin assignments 429 Console/Comm Port Configuration options 98 Console/Communication Port page 400 conventions, text 34 Copy button 185 copy config nvram command 285 copy config tftp command 278 copy configuration file 276 Copy Configuration Image to Server field 243 Copy File tab 358 copy running-config tftp command 270 copy tftp config command 278 crossover cable 427 Cumulative statistics 187 Current Unit Number field 210, 233 CurrentDefaultGateway field 345 CurrentImageVersion field 345 CurrentMgmtProtocol field 345 CurrentTime field 364 CurState field 366 Custom Banner tab 356 customer support 36
477
D
data, exporting 191 DB-9 console/comm port connector 428 default access community strings for Device Manager 175 default auto-negotiation-advertisements command 335 default autosave enable command 288 default autotopology command 298 default command 129, 131 default duplex command 326 default flowcontrol command 328 Default Gateway field 216 default ip address unit command 258 default ip domain-name command 265 default ipbootp server command 276 default lldp command 301 default lldp port config notification command 303 default lldp port status command 306 default lldp tx-tlv command 305 default mac-address-table aging-time command 146 default name command 322 default rate-limit command 331 Default read community 174 default settings 431 default speed command 324 Default TTL field 340 default ui-button command 315 Default write community 174 Descr field 338, 347, 348, 351, 353, 370, 372 Device Manager 147 installing on UNIX 160 installing on Windows 149 requirements 147 setting properties 172
478
Index
Device Manager window 171, 172 Device menu 178 Device Name field 176 device view, summary 179 device, opening 175 diagnostics 315 Disable command 184 disable command 133 disabled port, color 183 Display Event Log option 99 Display Port Statistics option 105 download command 316 duplex command 325 duplex mode 283, 323
F
Fan tab 352 fiber optic networks linking with Gigabit Ethernet ports 75 File System window 358 FileSystem dialog box 358 flash memory for software image upgrades 54 flow control 326 Flow Control field 114 flowcontrol command 327 format 123, 252 forwarding table 143 FwFileName field 359
E
EAPoL Security Configuration option 104 EAPoL with Guest VLAN 46 Edit command 184 Edit menu 178 Edit Selected button 179 Enable command 184 enable command 132 Enable field 173, 339 enable, name 319 end command 134 Ethernet 325/425 Switch connectors 425 Ethernet Switch 325 front panel 57 Ethernet Switch 425 front panel 67 Event Logging field 236 exit command 134 Export Data button 185, 191
G
gateway 252 gateway addresses, configuring 385 Gateway Setting field 388 GBIC 75 General CLI commands 251 Gigabit Ethernet 326 Gigabit Ethernet ports, linking with fiber optic networks 75 Globals tab 340 graph creating 191 modifying 192 Graph command 184 graph dialog box 192 Graph menu 178 Graph Selected button 179, 191 graph types 187
H
Hardware Unit Information screen 233 help 128, 129
320985-A
Index Help button 179 help command 130 Help menu 178 Help, Device Manager 196 High Speed Flow Control Configuration option 104 High Speed Flow Control Configuration screen 112 High Speed Flow Control page 393 high speed flow control, configuring 393 Horizontal button 193 hybrid mode 123 ip address command 252 IP Address tab 341 IP Address to Ping field 216 ip address unit command 257 IP addresses, configuring 385 ip bootp server command 275 IP Configuration option 97 IP Configuration screen 214 ip default-gateway command 254 IP dialog box 339 ip domain-name command 265 ip name-server command 263 IP page 385 IP Setting field 388 IpAddr field 365, 366 IPAddress field 342 IsPortShared field 371, 374
479
I
icons, about 205 Identify Unit Numbers page 211 IEEE 802.3u standard 54 IGMP Configuration option 105 image file 358 ImageFileName field 350, 359, 361 ImageLoadMode field 345 In Use field 215 Inactivity Timeout field 236 In-Band IP Address field 215 In-Band Subnet Mask field 216 Index field 370, 372 Insert button 185 installing the Device Manager software 149 interface command 133 Interface item, ARP 342 Interface tab for a single port 368 Interface tab for multiple ports 372 interfaces 133 IP 252 IP address 252, 253, 257, 258 per unit 257
L
Last Auto Configuration Status field 246 Last Manual Configuration Status field 246 LastChange field 370, 373 LastLoadProtocol field 346 LastSyncSource field 364 LastSyncTime field 364 LastValue statistics 187 LEDs descriptions 60, 76 display panel 59, 76 LEDs in device view 182 legend, port color 178, 183 Limit field 118 Line Chart button 193 Link field 112 Link Layer Discovery Protocol 40 link status 319 System Configuration Guide
480
Index icons 203, 205 main menu, console interface 96 ManualSyncRequest field 363 Max Traps in Log field 174 Maximum statistics 187 MDA viewing 181 MDAs 326 MDI-X to MDI cable connections 427 MDI-X to MDI-X cable connections 427 menu bar, Device Manager 177 menus 177 Microsoft Internet Explorer, software version requirements 199 Minimum statistics 187 MLT 283 MltId field 371, 374 Mtu field 370, 373 MultiLink Trunk Configuration option 105 multiple objects, selecting 181 multiple ports editing 371
link, lacking, color 183 LinkTrap field 370, 373 Listen for Syslogs 174 Listen for Traps 174 LLDP 40 TLVs 42 lldp command 300 lldp port config notification command 302 lldp port status command 305 lldp tx-tlv command 303 LnkTrap field 112 LoadServerAddr field 350, 359, 361 LocalSeg field 366 LocalStorageImageVersion field 345 Location field 347, 348 Log Scale button 193 logging 248, 289 logging out 382 logging out of Web-based management 382 Login Retries field 236 Login Timeout field 236 logout command 132 Logout option 100 LstChng field 347, 348
N
name command 321 Name field 370, 372 naming ports 321 netmask 252, 257 NetMask field 341 Netscape Navigator, software version requirements 199 network administrator contact information 389, 390 network configuration configuring power workgroups and a shared media hub 87 network protocol/standards compatibility 472
M
MAC address 138, 139, 143 MAC Address field 233 MAC address forwarding database table 143 MAC Address Security Configuration option 104 MAC Address Table option 104 MacAddr field 350, 366 MacAddress field 342 mac-address-table aging-time command 145 main menu headings and options 202 320985-A
Index network security, protecting system integrity 201 new features 39 new table entry, creating 185 New Unit Number field 210, 233 NextBootDefaultGateway field 345 NextBootLoadProtocol field 346 NextBootMgmtProtocol field 345 NextBootNetMask field 350 NextBootpAddr field 350 NextSyncTime field 364 NmmCurNum field 365 NmmLstChg field 365 NmmMaxNum field 365 no auto-negotiation-advertisements command 334 no autosave enable command 288 no autotopology command 298 no banner command 281 no clock summer-time command 296 no clock time-zone command 295 no command 129, 131 no flowcontrol command 327 no ip address command 253 no ip address unit command 258 no ip bootp server command 276 no ip default-gateway 254 no ip domain-name command 265 no ip name-server command 264 no lldp port config notification command 302 no lldp port status command 306 no lldp tx-tlv command 304 no name command 322 no rate-limit command 330 no shutdown command 320 no sntp enable command 290 no sntp server command 292 no tftp-server command 278 no ui-button command 315 NoSuchObject error message 368, 371
481
O
object types 180 objects editing 186 selecting 180 online Help 178, 196 Open Device button 175, 179 Open Device dialog box 175 operating port, color 183 OperDuplex field 370 OperSpeed field 371, 373 OperState field 347, 349, 351, 353 OperStatus field 370, 373 options Clear All Port Statistics 105 Console/Comm Port Configuration 98 Display Event Log 99 Display Port Statistics 105 IP Configuration 97 Logout 100 MAC Address Table 104 MultiLink Trunk Configuration 105 Port Configuration 104 Port Mirroring Configuration 105 Reset 97, 99 Reset to Default Settings 99 SNMP Configuration 97 Software Download 98 Spanning Tree Configuration 98 Switch Configuration 98 System Characteristics 98 TELNET Configuration 98 VLAN Configuration 104
482
Index Primary RADIUS Server field 230 PrimaryServer Address field 363 PrimaryServer SynchFailures field 364 Print button 185 product support 36 Properties dialog box 172, 173 Hotswap Poll Interval field 173 If Traps, Status Interval ) field 173 Status Poll Interval field 173 publications related 54
P
Packet Type field 117 passwords 127 Paste button 185 PhysAddress field 370, 373 ping command 259, 262 polling interval 191 port 319 port autonegotiation speed, configuring 390 port color legend 183 port communication speed, configuring 400 Port Configuration option 104 Port Configuration screen 109 port connections, troubleshooting 407 Port field 111, 113, 366, 372 Port Management page 390 Port Mirroring Configuration option 105 port mirroring configuration rules 53 port number and port list 123 port shortcut menu 184 port, enabling or disabling 319 PortActiveComponent field 371, 374 portlist 123 portnum 123 ports 323 color-coded 182 controlling 367 disabled 183 editing 367, 371 naming 283, 321 selecting 181 viewing 367, 371 power cord warnings (multilingual) 63, 80 power cords 62, 79 Power Supply tab 350, 351 power-up sequence 406
Q
QoS 178 Quick Start 377 Quick Start page 377 quit 132
R
RADIUS password fallback 45 RADIUS Shared Secret field 230 RADIUS UPD Port field 230 Rate Limit tab 338 Rate Limiting 402 Rate Limiting Configuration option 105 Rate Limiting Configuration screen 115 Rate Limiting page 402 rate-limit command 330 Read Community field 176 Read Community, SNMP 176 Read Community, SNMP field 176 Read-Only Community String field 220 Read-Write Community String field 220 Read-Write-All access 176, 185 ReasmMaxSize field 341
320985-A
Index ReasmTimeout field 340 reboot 379 ReBoot field 345 Refresh Device Status button 179 Register for Traps 174 release notes, obtaining 201 reload command 136 Renumber Stack Units screen 232 renumber unit command 143 Renumber units with new setting? field 233 request mode, choosing 216 requirements 125 accessing the CLI 125 Device Manager 147 power cords 62, 79 terminal 125 UNIX installation of Device Manager 160 Windows installation of Device Manager 149 reset 379 Reset Changes button 185 Reset page 380 Reset to Default Settings option 99 Reset to Defaults page 381, 382 resetting the switch/stack 379 resetting the switch/stack, to system defaults 381 restore factory-default command 261 Retrieve Configuration File from Server field 246 Retrieve Configuration Image from Server field 243 Retry Count field 174 RFC 54 RJ-45 port connector illustration 425 pin assignments 426 Rmon menu 178
483
S
save config command 286 scripts 119, 132, 133 Secondary RADIUS Server field 230 SecondaryServer Address field 363 SecondaryServer SynchFailures field 364 Secure Shell 194 security, configuring passwords 379 SegId field 366 serial port 125 SerNum field 347, 349 Sernum field 338 setting usernames and passwords 127 settings, default 431 SFP GBIC 75 SFP GBIC Support 53 shortcut menus port 184 switch unit 183 show arp-table command 282 show auto-negotiation-advertisements command 331 show auto-negotiation-capabilities command 332 show autosave command 287 show autotopology nmm-table command 299 show autotopology settings command 298 show banner command 281 show cli command 272 show clock summer-time command 296 show clock time-zone command 296 show config-network command 267 show interfaces command 283 show interfaces config command 284 show ip address command 256 show ip command 255 System Configuration Guide
484
Index LED indication descriptions 396 process 317, 394, 395 Software Download option 98 Software Download page 394 Software Download screens 237 software installation UNIX 160 Windows 149 software version requirements Microsoft Internet Explorer 199 Netscape Navigator 199 software versions 138 software, downloading 315 Spanning Tree Configuration option 98 speed 283, 323 speed command 323 Speed field 370, 373 Speed/Duplex field 112, 114 SSH 194 SSH button 179 SSH session 179 stack 283 Stack field 117, 118 Stack Info tab 348 stack information 141 Stack Information field 208 Stack Information page 207 stack information, viewing 207 Stack Inventory field 209 stack MAC address 89 Stack Numbering page 209 stack numbering, configuring 209 stack up/down configurations 89 Stacked button 193 stacking 44 cascade up and down connectors 78 considerations 92
show ip dns command 262 show lldp command 307 show lldp port command 309 show mac-address-table command 144 show rate-limit command 329 show running-config command 269 show sntp command 289 show stack-info command 141 show sys-info command 138, 273 show tech command 139 show terminal command 271, 272 show tftp-server command 277 show ui-button command 314 shutdown command 319 shutdown command for the unit 134 Shutdown option 100 Simple Network Time Protocol 248 single object, selecting 180 Slot field 366 SNMP Access field 235 SNMP Configuration option 97 SNMP Configuration screen 219 SNMP trap port 46 SNMP traps 195 SNTP 248, 289, 363 local time zone 249 SNTP dialog box 362 sntp enable command 290 sntp server primary address command 291 sntp server secondary address command 291 sntp sync-interval command 293 sntp sync-now command 293 software download process 240 image upgrades 54 software download 320985-A
Index initial installation 88 overview 87 stack MAC address 89 stacking considerations 89 standalone mode 123 standards 55 Start Ping field 216 Start TFTP Load of New Image field 240 State field 363 statistics for a single object 190 for multiple objects 191 graphing 186 single port 190 types 187 statistics dialog box multiple objects 190 statistics dialog boxes 178 Status field 112, 360, 365 Stop button 185 subnet mask 252, 257 summary options changing stack numbering 209 identifying unit numbers 211 viewing stack information 207 switch information 206 Support heading 201 support, Nortel Networks 36 switch configuration files not-saved parameters 399 retrieving from a TFTP server 397 storing on a TFTP server 397 Switch Configuration Menu 103 options 104 Switch Configuration option 98 switch configuration options bootP settings 385 gateway settings 385 high speed flow control 393 IP settings 385 network manager contact 389 port autonegotiation speed 390 port communication speed 400 retrieving from a TFTP server 397 storing on a TFTP server 397 switch images, downloading 394 system location 389 system name 389 Switch field 118 switch images, downloading 394 switch information viewing 206 Switch Information page 206 switch port autonegotiation speed, configuring 390 switch stack, selecting 181 switch unit shortcut menu 183 switch, selecting 180 switches supported 33 SyncInterval field 363 sysContact field 344, 376 sysDescr field 344 sysLocation field 344, 376 sysName field 344, 376 System Characteristics option 98 System Characteristics screen 100, 221 System Characteristics screen fields Base Unit 101, 222 Last Reset Type 102, 222 Local MDA Type 102, 222 MAC Address 102, 222 Operational Mode 101, 222 Power Status 102, 222 Reset Count 102, 222 Size of Stack 101, 222 sysContact 102, 223 sysDescr 102, 222 sysLocation 102, 223
485
486
Index terminal 132 requirements 125 settings 270 terminal command 271 text conventions 34 TFTP 276 TFTP Server IP Address field 239, 242, 245 tftp-server command 277 time zone, setting 249 Timeout field 174 timestamps 248, 289 toolbar, Device Manager 178 tooltip 184 topology 364 Topology Table tab 365 Trace field 174 traffic Gigabit Ethernet 326 Traffic Type field 339 Trap IP Address fields 220 trap log 195 Trap Log button 179 Trap Port field 174 Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) software download 238 troubleshooting 252 access 132, 253, 258 locations of Help files 196 ping 259, 262 port interface 407 port numbers 123 ports 133 power-up sequence 406 receiving traps 196 SNTP 248, 289 stack 143 timestamps 248, 289 Trunk field 111
sysName 102, 223 sysObjectID 102, 222 sysServices 102, 223 sysUpTime 102, 222 system default settings, resetting to 381 System Description field 390 system information 138, 139 System Information page 375 System Location field 390 system location, naming 389 system name, configuring 389 System Object ID field 390 System page 389 system settings modifying 389 system contact 390 system location 390 system name 390 System tab 343, 344 System Up Time field 390 sysUpTime field 344, 376
T
Tab key navigation 129 tables and input forms, about 204 technical specifications 469 technical support 36 Telnet 125 TELNET Access field 235 Telnet button 179, 193 Telnet session 179, 193 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration option 98 TELNET/SNMP/Web Access Configuration screen 234 TELNET/WEB Stack Password Type field 226 TELNET/WEB Switch Password Type field 226 320985-A
Index Type field 338, 342, 347, 370, 372 types of objects 180 Web quick start 377 Web-based management opening from Device Manager 194 Web-based management interface home page, graphic 195, 200 logging in 200 main menu, icons 203, 205 management page 204 navigating the menu 201 requirements to use 199 window, Device Manager 177 Windows installing Device Manager 149 Write Community field 176 Write Community, SNMP 176 write memory command 286
487
U
UI button 68 ui-button enable command 313 ui-button unit command 314 Unit field 111, 113, 117 unit numbers, identifying 211 Unit tab 338 UNIX installing Device Manager 160 receiving traps 196 upgrading diagnostics 315 upgrading software 315 User Interface button 68 usernames and passwords 127 Using DNS to ping and Telnet 249
V
ValidFlag tab 350 value, changed 186 Ver field 338, 347, 349 Viewing 367 VLAN Configuration Control 52 VLAN field 379 VLAN menu 178 VLAN port tagging 51 VLANs Configuration option 104
W
Web Access field 236 Web browser, requirements 199 Web Help file, accessing 201 Web Quick Start 377 System Configuration Guide
488
Index
320985-A